Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPROJECT MANUAL - 11-00170 - 525 S Center St - BYUI Taylor Quadm ( I.DAHO BYU IDAHO CENTRAL QUAD 18 March 2011 Kim D. Clark President Vice President, University Resources ie Clark, Managing Di University Operations Director, Facility Planning & Construction CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY - IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 0 - STANDARD CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS I. INVITATION TO BID II. NOTICE TO BIDDERS III. FORM OF PROPOSAL IV. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS V. FORM OF CONTRACT A. SHORT FORM B. LONG FORM VI. GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS A. GENERAL CONDITIONS B. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS C. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS VII. MONTHLY PROGRESS ESTIMATE SCHEDULE OF VALUES DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 010000 SECTION 01 1000 SECTION 01 3100 SECTION 01 3200 SECTION 013233 SECTION 013300 SECTION 01 4000 SECTION 01 5000 SECTION 01 6000 SECTION 01 7300 SECTION 01 7329 SECTION 01 7700 SECTION 01 7839 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES QUALITY REQUIREMENTS TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS EXECUTION CUTTING AND PATCHING CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS SECTION 02 4119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE SECTION 03 3000 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 05 - METALS SECTION 05 1200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SECTION 05 5213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 09070 (3/18/11) TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY - IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES SECTION 06 1063 RECLAIMED WOOD LUMBER DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 1416 DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 0501 SECTION 26 0502 SECTION 26 0519 SECTION 26 0526 SECTION 26 0533 SECTION 26 0553 SECTION 26 2726 SECTION 26 5100 SECTION 26 6210 COLD FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS LINE -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION WIRING DEVICES LIGHTING FIXTURES DATA SYSTEM CABLING DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS BYU-IDAHO TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING STANDARD DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK SECTION 31 1000 SITE CLEARING SECTION 31 2000 EARTH MOVING DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS SECTION 32 1313 CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 32 1373 CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS SECTION 32 3223 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS SECTION 32 8400 PLANTING IRRIGATION SECTION 32 9200 TURF AND GRASSES SECTION 32 9300 PLANTS DIVISION 33 -UTILITIES SECTION 33 4100 STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 09070 (3/18/11) TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2 Facility Planning & Construction Brigham Young University—Idaho • 283 Physical Plant • Rexburg, ID • 83460-8205 March 17, 2011 Invited Contractors Re: Invitation to Bid — BYU-Idaho Central Quad Project No. - 10009 To Whom It May Concern: You are invited to bid on the above -referenced project. This project consists of the construction of an outdoor amphitheater, concrete platform and trellis. Work will include excavation, concrete demo and placement, tree removal, rough grading, segmented retaining walls, landscape, and outdoor lighting. The project completion date is August 26, 2011. A mandatory pre-bid has been scheduled for March 24, 2011 at 4:00 Dm, in Room 212 of the Physical Facilities Building. Bids will be opened and read aloud on April 7, 2011 at 4:00 pm, in Room 212 of the Physical Facilities Building at Brigham Young University -Idaho. A performance bond and a labor and materials payment bond for 100% of the contract will be required for this project. We hope that you will be able to bid this project. Sincerely, Rulon Nielsen Director, Facility Planning and Construction RRN/mt Rulon Nielsen Facilities Planning/Construction Director 450 S. Physical Plant Way Rexburg, ID 83460-8205 Phone: (208) 496-2660 Fax: (208) 496-2653 Email: nielsenm@byui.edu r� NOTICE TO BIDDERS SECTION 1--PROJECT: BYU-Idaho Central Quad Project Number: 10009 SECTION 2-- LOCATION: BYU-Idaho SECTION 3--OWNER: BYU-Idaho SECTION 4--DESIGNER; FFKR Architect SECTION 5 --STANDARD CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS: The bidder is directed to the Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints, Brigham Young University Standard Contract Requirements (revised 6 October 1999). This volume is an integral part of the contract documents and is hereby made a part of the contract. SECTION 6-- TIME OF COMPLETION: A. Date: August 26, 2011 SECTION 7--PREBID CONFERENCE A. Prebid Conference will be: Date: March 24, 2011 Time: 4:00 PM Place: Physical Facilities Building, Room 212 SECTION S--RECEIPT AND OPENING OF BIDS: A. Bids will be received: Date: April 7, 2011 Time: 4:00 PM Place: Physical Facilities Building, Room 212 By: Rulon Nielsen B. The Owner reserves the exclusive right to release all publicity relating to the proposals and the project. SECTION 9--GENERAL CONTRACTORS: A. Bidding by General Contractors will be by invitation only. SECTION 10--DRAWINGS: A. Drawings are available at the following plan room locations: BYU-Idaho Physical Facilities Building Architect Website (if applicable) 3/1/2011 Notice to Bidders r � - BYU-Idaho FORM OF PROPOSAL AME OF PROJECT: BYLI-Idaho Central Quad 30JECT:10009 AME OF ATE OF re undersigned, hereinafter referred to as the Bidder, certifies that the following facts and/or circumstances have occurred or exist lating to the proposed work for BW -Idaho Central Quad were prepared by FFKR Architects. I. That Bidder has received the contract documents for the above entitled project. 2. That Bidder has received The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter -Day Saints BYU-Idaho Standard Contract Requirements, revised October 6, 1999. 3. That Bidder is familiar with such documents, has examined the site of the proposed work, including availability of access, utilities, and other similar items relating to performance of the work and is thoroughly familiar with all general and local conditions which could in any way affect this work. 4. That no verbal agreements or representations with or by any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner exist or have been made to the Bidder and the Bidder in submitting this proposal is in no way relying thereon. 5. That if this proposal is accepted, Bidder will enter into a contract with the Owner in substantially the form contained in the contract documents, and will provide the bonds, insurance coverage and all other items required by the contract documents. 6. The term "base bid" shall be understood to include all work contained in the contract documents excluding any substitutes or alternates. The Owner will have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. idder hereby proposes to furnish all materials, labor, equipment, plant, tools, transportation, services, licenses and permits necessary for e completion of all the work set forth in the contract documents for the sum of: ;now Melt) W4 1 Fonn of Proposal AS FURTHER CONDITIONS OF THIS PROPOSAL: I. The Bidder agrees to complete the work on or before August 26, 2011. 2. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of addenda No. (s) 3. The Bidder's contractor's license number is 4. Is your bonding capacity adequate for this job? Yes_ No_ 5. For verification call Telephone Number 6. Is your license limit adequate for this job? Yes _ No PROPOSED SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS The total sum of the Bidder's proposal shall include the furnishing and installing of all materials, equipment, and labor as called for in the contract documents as a base bid. Hereafter give the total amount to be added or deducted for a complete installation of equipment or materials other than those specified and those approved by addendum are submitted for the Owner's consideration. All materials and equipment proposed for substitution shall be listed below and must meet the requirements of the contract documents. During the time of consideration of the proposals, complete information shall be submitted immediately to the Architect and Owner's Representative. The Contractor is referred to Page 3 of the Instructions to Bidders, Section 9, prior approvals and substitutions for requirements relative to proposed substitutions. Proposed Manufacturer and Substitute Catalog Numbers $ Add $ Deduct I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2/2004 2 Form of Proposal YPE OF BIDDER'S ORGANIZATION: fficial Name of Organization orporation, Co -partnership, Individual, or Other ddress ame of Individual Members of Finn: _ Name 'President of Corporation: ame of Secretary of Corporation: )rporation is organized under the laws of the State o£ eal( Signature Title or Office Legal Address BIDDER'S LIST OF SUBCONTRACT BIDS USED IN PROPOSAL ;004 3 Form of Proposal (LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS) PROJECTNAME: BYU-Idaho Central Quad PROJECT NUMBER: 10009 OWNER'S NAME: BYU-Idaho SUBCONTRACT CLASSIFICATIONS I SUBCONTRACTOR USED I AMOUNT 2/2004 9 Form of Proposal INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION 1 -- BIDDING BY INVITATION A. Bidding shall be by written invitation only. Those wanting to be considered for such invitation shall apply to: Facility Planning and Construction Department BYU-Idaho Physical Facilities Building 450 S. Physical Plant Way Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205 B. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids. SECTION 2 -- CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Contract documents may be obtained by contractors from: Facility Planning and Construction Department BYU-Idaho Physical Facilities Building 450 S. Physical Plant Way Rexburg, Idaho 83460-8205 A website may also be set up by the architect where plans can be viewed and downloaded. If so, web information can be obtained through the general contractors or by contacting BYU-Idaho Facility Planning and Construction. B. Subcontractors and suppliers who want to obtain Contract documents (plans and specifications) may do so by contacting those general contractors invited to bid. C. All Contract documents must be returned within ten (10) days after the bid opening. SECTION 3 -- CONTRACT METHOD A. All work specified is to be done under one general contract. Bids will be accepted bythe Owner from prime contractors only. SECTION 4 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. If any Bidder doubts the true meaning of any ofthe Contract documents, or finds errors, discrepancies or omissions, he shall request a clarification from the Architect in writing. Any interpretations or corrections will be made onlybywritten addenda duly issued by the Owner. All addenda will be mailed, faxed or otherwise delivered to each person receiving a set of the Contract documents. Requests for clarifications must be submitted to the Architect at least five (5) days before bid opening. Unwritten instructions or interpretations will have no validity. B. Should discrepancies appear in the Contract documents that are not resolved by an addendum, it is expressly understood that the Contractor has used the most expensive method and/or material in the bid. SECTION 5 -- REQUIREMENTS BEFORE SUBMITTING BIDS A. The Contractor shall become thoroughly familiar with the site and structures located there (if any). The Contractor shall thoroughly examine all Contract documents in relation to all conditions that might directly or indirectly affect the contract work. The bid amount shall reflect all such conditions. SECTION 6 -- PREPARING AND SUBMITTING BIDS A. To receive consideration, a bid must be made according to the following instructions: Bids shall be prepared on BYU bid forms. Bids shall have all items or blanks filled. Numbers shall be stated both in writing and in figures. If there is a discrepancy between the two, the written number shall govern. Bids shall be without interlineations, alterations or erasures. 312011 1 Instmctions to Bidders 4. Signatures shall be by those authorized to execute the Contract. 5. The Bidder's legal name, business address and telephone number shall be stated. 6. Neither oral bids nor modifications shall be considered. 7. Faxed bids will be accepted if the bidder (1) contacts the Construction Section before faxing the bid, (2) sends tl bid with sufficient time to be received and delivered to the bid opening location before bid time, and (3) calls tl Construction Section before bid time to confirm that the bid was received and delivered to the bid opening locatio 8. It is the Bidder's sole responsibility to see that the bid is received at the proper time. Any bid received after d scheduled bid opening time will be returned unopened to the Bidder. 9. Bidders shall accept proposals from only those subcontractors who are approved by the Owner. It will be assumf that the question of bonding subcontractors, where considered desirable or necessary by the Contractor, includir the cost of such bonds, has been resolved before bids have been submitted. 10. In order for the bid to be considered valid, two or more Bidders bidding as a "joint venture" must have the wriat approval of the Owner before submitting a bid. All members of ajoint venture shall sign the bid and an offici representative of the joint venture shall be designated in the proposal. 11. The term "base bid" shall be understood to include all work contained in the Contract, excluding anyalternates r substitutes. The Owner shall have the right to accept alternates in any order or combination, and to determine t1!; low Bidder based on the sum of the base bid and alternates accepted. 12. Substitutes or alternates accepted by the Owner may be included in the Contract or added by Change Order. determining the low Bidder, the Owner will not consider substitutes. 13. Bids may be withdrawn by the Bidder, either in person or by a written request before bid opening. Once openei the Bidders will have 24 hours to review and withdraw their bids. After the 24-hour period, the bids may not I withdrawn and must remain fixed as submitted for 45 days after opening. Envelopes must contain nothing but t proposal and bid breakdown forms if required. Envelopes shall be opaque, sealed and bear the Bidder's name SECTION 7 -- APPROVAL OF CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS A. As soon after the bid opening as is practicable, the Owner will interview the apparent low Bidder and if deemed advisabl the second or third low Bidders. Within two hours of the bid opening, the low Bidder and the second or third low Bidde) will provide to the Owner a list of subcontractors and their dollar amounts that were used in formulating their bid. The list c subcontractors will be examined by the Owner as soon as possible. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject ar, subcontract proposal. B. If a Bidder doubts the correctness or acceptability of any subcontract proposal, the Bidder may submit the names and amoui of other competing subcontractors for consideration, making sure that he clearly states which one he has used in f innulatin his proposal. SECTION 8 -- FACTORS AFFECTING AWARD OR REJECTION OF BID A. The Bidder's and subcontractor's past performance, organization, equipment and ability to perform and complete the contract as specified will be vital elements, as well as the amount of their bids, in the award of the Contract. B. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, or to waive any irregularities or informalities in bids received. Th Owner reserves the right to accept the bid that will, in the Owner's opinion, best serve the interests of the Owner regardles of whether such bid is the lowest. SECTION 9 -- PRIOR APPROVALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS A. Several acceptable brands of equipment, manufactured articles or methods of construction may have been identified in th Contract. It is not intended to close the Contract against other brands, articles, or methods that may warrant consideration However, unspecified materials must have prior approval by the Owner to be considered. B. Prior Approvals: Requests for approval of unspecified materials must be made to the Architect at least five days before bin opening. The requests for prior approval shall be considered by the Architect if time permits and if properly documentec The Architect is not bound to consider these items despite their apparent validity. C. Fully detailed technical data, references and other information shall be furnished simultaneously with the requests for prio 3/2011 2 Instructions to Bidders approval items. D. Such requests shall be reviewed by the Architect and the Owner. If accepted, the approved requests will be included in an addendum. E. The Contractor's "base bid" shall include the furnishing of only those items that are explicitly specified or which have received prior approval by addendum. F. Substitutions: Besides the "base bid," any equipment or material supplier and any contractor or subcontractor may, at his option, submit a substitute price and product for any item specified which he feels warrants consideration by the Owner. This proposed substitution is to be listed where indicated on the bid form. G. Any proposed substitute submitted by a Bidder shall include the amount by which the "base bid" would be increased or decreased. H. The Owner may accept or reject any substitute proposed. In determining the low Bidder, the Owner will not consider substitutes. If requested, the Contractor shall furnish information or data concerning the substitute. The Owner may request the Contractor, at his own expense, to have the substitute tested by an approved testing laboratory. SECTION 10 -- FORM OF CONTRACT A. Copies of the form of the Contract that the successful Bidder will be required to execute are included in this specification. SECTION 11 --ADDENDA A. All addenda issued before bid opening shall be included in the bid and shall be a part of the Contract. SECTION 12 -- REQUIREMENTS IMMEDIATELY AFTER SIGNING THE CONTRACT A. Immediately after signing the Contract, the Contractor shall famish the following to the Owner: 1. Executed performance, labor and material payment bonds, each in an amount equal to 100 percent of the contract sum as specified in the General Conditions. 2. Insurance certificates as specified in the General Conditions. 3. A cost breakdown of the work that may, as approved by the Owner, serve as a basis for making monthly payments to the Contractor. 4. A project schedule as to how he intends to construct the project. This must be, in the opinion of the Owner, a realistic method of analyzing and scheduling each component of the work. It must show when all trades or crafts start and finish their work. This schedule must be reviewed at least biweekly and updated as required. A critical path method of scheduling is preferred. Ifthe Contractor cannot produce and maintain such a schedule, this service must be obtained from an outside consultant. The schedule must be approved by the Owner's Representative before the Contractor submits the first payment request. B. The Contractor shall issue subcontracts as mutually agreed between the Owner and the Contractor. A complete list of subcontractors and major suppliers including names, addresses and telephone numbers are required within fourteen (14) days of the Owner's subcontractor review. SECTION 13 -- DISQUALIFICATION A. If the above requirements are not satisfied, the bid may be disqualified at the discretion of the Owner. 3/2011 3 Instructions to Bidders '- i � �� � r...i i .:i BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY -IDAHO PHYSICAL FACILITIES DEPARTMENT REXBURG, ID 83460-8205 SHORT FORM CONTRACT To: Contract Date: Project No.: Work Order No: (Hereinafter called "Contractor") Brigham Young University -Idaho (hereinafter called "Owner") engages the contractor to perform and complete the following described work, on the terms and subject to the conditions hereafter set forth (including the Contract documents identified below): A. IDENTIFICATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Furnish all labor and materials to do work as contained in the plans and specifications entitled " " dated , and prepared by . The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints Brigham Young University -Idaho Standard Contract Requirements are a part of this contract. B. COMPENSATION: Total compensation for the above work shall be $ C. TIME OF COMPLETION: The work shall be completed on or before D. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE I S : Rulon Nielsen E. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE IS: The Contractor agrees to perform the work covered by this Contract and to comply with and be bound by all of the terms and conditions contained in the Contract Documents. UNIVERSITY OPERATIONS MANAGING DIRECTOR UNIVERSITY RESOURCES DATE VICE PRESIDENT DISTRIBUTION: 1. Contractor 2, Owner's Representative 3. Purchasing 2/2004 CONTRACTOR DATE THE CHURCH OF JESUS CHRIST OF LATTER-DAY SAINTS CHURCH EDUCATIONAL SYSTEM CONTRACT CONTRACT AT BYU-IDAHO Project No: Work Order No: Account No: THIS CONTRACT, made and executed as of the ?????????, by and between BYU-IDAHO, a non-profit Utah corporation of Rexburg, Idaho (hereinafter referred to as "Owner"), and ?????? (hereinafter referred to as "Contractor" ). WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments hereinafter specified to be paid by the Owner to the Contractor and the covenants and agreement herein contained to be kept and performed by the parties hereto, the Contractor agrees to the construction of the Sped Replacement Building at BYU-Idaho in Rexburg, Idaho (hereinafter referred to as the "Project"), and to furnish and deliver all materials, and perform and supervise all work as required herein and by the contract documents hereinafter identified, all of which shall collectively constitute the contract, and shall hereinafter be referred to collectively as the "Contract". ARTICLE I. THE IDENTIFICATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Plans entitled "???" were prepared by ??? and approved by Rulon Nielsen, Facilities Planning and Construction Director at BYU-Idaho, on ???. B. The Specifications entitled "???" were prepared by???, and approved by Rulon Nielsen, Facilities Planning and Construction Director at BYU-Idaho, on ???. C. Addendum Number One, dated ??? D. Addendum Number Two, dated ??? 2/2004 Long Form Contract E. Addendum Number Three, dated ??? F. Addendum Number Four, dated ??? G. The Church of Jesus Christ of Latter-day Saints Standard Contract Documents are a part of this Contract (including the Supplementary Conditions). ARTICLE II. THE CONTRACT SUM The Owner agrees to pay to the Contractor, in accordance with the terms hereof, the following: (spell M. Base Bid $??? Alt. 1 If any Alt. 2 If any Total $??? The Contractor agrees to accept a total of (spell as full compensation for performing his obligation under the contract. ARTICLE III. DATE OF COMPLETION The Contractor agrees to complete the work required by the Contract on or before midnight???. Time is hereby expressly declared to be of the essence of the contract. ARTICLE IV. THE CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The Contractor's Representative is ??? ARTICLE V. THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE The Owner's Representative is Rulon Nielsen 2/2004 Long Forth Contract IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Owner has caused this instrument to be signed by its President, attested by its Secretary, and its corporate seal to be hereunto affixed, and the Contractor has hereunto affixed his signature as of the day and year above written. ATTEST: BYU-IDAHO A Utah Corporation President– BYU-Idaho University Resources Vice President – BYU-Idaho Contractor ACKNOWLEDGED: University Operations Managing Director—BYU-Idaho 2/2004 Long Forth Contract ,r:, GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 1 - DEFINITIONS SECTION 2 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SECTION 3 - DISCREPANCIES IN CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SECTION 4 - ADDITIONAL DRAWINGS & INSTRUCTIONS SECTION 5 - OWNERSHIP AND MAINTENANCE OF DRAWINGS SECTION 6 - PROGRESS MEETINGS SECTION 7 - PROJECT SCHEDULE SECTION 8 - EMERGENCIES SECTION 9 - SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES SECTION 10 - ROYALTIES & PATENTS SECTION 11 - CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE & BONDS SECTION 12 - HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT SECTION 13 - BUILDER'S RISK LOSSES SECTION 14 - PERMITS AND REGULATIONS SECTION 15 - MEASUREMENTS, SURVEYS, BUILDING LAYOUT, & SITE EXAMINATION SECTION 16 - INSPECTION OF WORK SECTION 17 - SUPERVISION & CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES SECTION 18 - ARCHITECT'S STATUS AND DECISIONS SECTION 19 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 20 - TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES SECTION 21 - TESTING SECTION 22 - CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 23 - CONDEMNATION OF WORK SECTION 24 - CHANGES IN WORK SECTION 25 - CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST SECTION 26 - DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME SECTION 27 - DISPUTES SECTION 28 - CORRECTION & WARRANTY OF WORK SECTION 29 - OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK SECTION 30 - CONTRACTOR'S PAY REQUEST SECTION 31 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR SECTION 32 - PAYMENTS WITHHELD SECTION 33 - CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY SECTION 34 - SUBCONTRACTORS SECTION 35 - LOCKOUT/TAGOUT, CONFINED SPACE AND HAZARD COMMUNICATION SECTION 36 - OWNER'S RIGHT TO CANCEL CONTRACT 3/2008 General Conditions/PC SECTION 37 - CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT SECTION 38 - SEPARATE CONTRACTS SECTION 39 - ASSIGNMENT SECTION 40 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES SECTION 41 - ACCELERATION OF WORK SECTION 42 - CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL SECTION 43 - TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE OF ANY MECHANICAL DEVICES SECTION 44 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT SECTION 45 - OWNER -PURCHASED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 3/2008 General Conditions/C GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION 1 - DEFINITIONS A. OWNER - Brigham Young University- Idaho, Rexburg, Idaho hereinafter referred to as the "Owner." B. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE - The Facilities Planning and Construction Director - Physical Facilities Department -Physical Facilities Building, Room 283, Brigham Young University -Idaho, Rexburg, Idaho 83460- 8205 C. ARCHITECT - The Architect is a licensed Architect, Engineer, or organization so designated in the Contract. The term "Architect" means the Architect or his authorized representative. D. CONTRACTOR - The Contractor is the person or organization identified as such in the Contract and referred to throughout the Contract as if singular in number and masculine in gender. The term "Contractor" means General Contractor or his authorized representative. E. SUBCONTRACTOR - The person, firm or corporation supplying direct or indirect labor and/or materials at the site of the Project and under separate contract or agreement with the Contractor. PROJECT COORDINATOR - The person who acts as liaison between the Owner and the Contractor for the Project. G. THE WORK - The work includes all labor necessary to produce the construction required by the Contract and all materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in such construction. H. THE PROJECT - The Project is the total construction designed by the Architect. The work performed under the Contract may be the whole or a part. WRITTEN NOTICE - Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to an officer of the corporation for whom it was intended. Written notice is also served by a registered or certified mailing to the last known address of the corporation. SECTION 2 - THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The "Contract " consists of the Contract, the Instructions to Bidders, the Supplementary Conditions, the General Conditions, the Drawings, the Specifications, Addenda and Change Orders. A modification may be made only by Change Order after execution of the Contract. B. The Contract - The Contract represents the entire agreement between the parties and supersedes all prior negotiations, representations or agreements (either written or oral) including the bidding documents. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Change Order. C. The Contract and associated documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. The intention of the Contract is to include all labor, materials, equipment and other items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Project. D. Words that have well-known technical or trade meanings are used herein by such recognized meanings. E. Within the Contract there shall be the following precedence: 1. The Contract takes precedence over all other documents. 2. Supplementary General Conditions take precedence over General Conditions. 3. General Conditions take precedence over Drawings and Specifications. 4. Addenda or modifications of any nature, to the Drawings and Specifications, take precedence over the original. 5. Specifications take precedence over Drawings. 1.2011 1 General Conditions 6. Within the Working Drawings, the larger scale takes precedence over smaller, figured dimensions over scaled, and noted materials over graphic indications. SECTION 3 - DISCREPANCIES IN THE CONTRACT A. Should any question arise regarding the Contract, the Contractor shall request written interpretation and clarification from the Architect before proceeding. Without such request and authorization, the Contractor proceeds at his own risk. SECTION 4 - ADDITIONAL DRAWINGS & INSTRUCTIONS A. The Architect shall promptly furnish any additional instructions or clarification necessary for proper execution of the work specified in the Contract. SECTION 5 - OWNERSHIP AND MAINTENANCE OF DRAWINGS A. All drawings and specifications furnished to the Contractor are the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on other work and are to be returned to the Owner if so requested. One copy may be retained by the Contractor. B. The Owner shall furnish, free of charge to the Contractor, all copies of drawings and specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the work. The Contractor shall keep in good order on the Project one copy of drawings, addenda and specifications that shall be readily available to the Architect and the Project Coordinator. SECTION 6 - PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Weeklyjob site meetings will be held by the Project Coordinator. The agenda and meeting minutes will be prepared by the Architect. The Architect shall distribute meeting minutes within seven days of the meeting. I. The Contractor shall attend such meetings and shall require subcontractors to attend as necessary. 2. These meetings are to: a. Insure that all activities are being coordinated properly on the Project. b. Review the schedule. C. Check the status of. (I) Submittals, including shop drawings and samples. (2) Change Orders and Job Instructions. (3) Payment requests. (4) Any other matters that may need to be reviewed. SECTION 7 - PROJECT SCHEDULE A. Within 7 days after the notice to proceed and not less than 14 days prior to the first pay request, the contractor shall submit a project schedule to include all sections of work associated with the project. The project schedule shall be submitted in a CPM format using a recognized scheduling software. The Contractor shall prepare the schedule to be printed out on a sheet or series of sheets of reproducible media, of sufficient width to show data for the entire construction period. B. The Contractor shall submit a printed form of the schedule as noted above and shall also submit the schedule on disk so the owner can review the schedule and use the schedule. The Contractor shall submit the schedule with early start early finish dates and late start late finish dates. Changes during the contract period that do not impact the schedule beyond the contract completion date will not be considered as an impact. C. The schedule shall be in sufficient detail to include, but not be limited to, all sections of the specifications and plans that are of significant elements to the project. All work shall be represented to show relationships leading to the critical path of the project. D. After the acceptance of the schedule the contractor shall submit a baseline schedule. This baseline schedule will be used throughout the project to evaluate impact of change orders and delays. The baseline schedule 1.2011 2 General Conditions shall be updated and reviewed at each project meeting as directed by the owner's representative. E. All activities on the schedule shall be related to the schedule of values of the project. This relationship shall be submitted with each pay request with an updated schedule to show actual work in place vs. scheduled, with percentages shown of both dollars and work in place for the total project and the current billing period. SECTION 8 - EMERGENCIES A. In case of an emergency endangering life or threatening the safety of the structure or of adjoining property, the Contractor may, without waiting for specific authorization from the Architect or Owner, act at his own discretion to safeguard life or property. Compensation and time shall be allowed the Contractor for such emergency work. The amount of both shall be decided between the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner. B. The Contractor shall notify the Project Coordinator immediately and shall make a full written report of such emergency action to the Project Coordinator within seven days after the event. SECTION 9 - SUBMITTALS, SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. General: 1. Deliver submittals, shop drawings or samples to the Owner and Architect as indicated below. Accompany each submittal with a transmittal letter indicating the title of the Project, the name of the Contractor, the title of the submittal and the specification section number. B. Submittal Schedule: 1. The Contractor shall, within twenty-one (21) calendar days after receipt of the signed contract, furnish a submittal schedule listing all items that the Contract requires for review. This schedule shall include, among other things, shop drawings, manufacturers' literature, certificates of compliance, material samples, material colors, guarantees, etc. 2. The schedule shall show the type of item, the Contract requirement reference, the Contractor's scheduled dates for submitting the items and the projected need dates for review answers from Architect. The schedule shall show a minimum of twenty-one (21) calendar days for review by the Architect. If re -submittal is i required, an additional fourteen (14) days will be allowed. The Contractor shall revise and update this schedule as appropriate and submit it with each payment estimate until all items have been submitted and reviewed. 3. Coordinate the submittal schedule with the Project schedule for all the work. The Contractor shall revise and update the submittal schedule to insure consistency with the Project schedule. The Contractor shall promptly provide such revised submittal schedules to the Owner. 4. Furnishing of the submittal schedule or subsequent revisions shall not be interpreted as relieving the Contractor of the obligation to comply with all Contract requirements for items on the schedule. C. Definitions I. Shop drawings are drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures, and other data prepared by the Contractor or subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor. Shop drawings illustrate some portion of the work and confirm dimensions and conformance to the Contract. 2. Samples are physical examples furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials, equipment, color, or construction and to help establish standards by which the work will bejudged. D. Procedure: I. The Contractor shall review and stamp his approval and certification that the products and methods meet the requirements specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall submit four (4) copies to the Architect and one (1) copy to the Owner, with reasonable promptness and in orderly sequence. Shop drawings and samples not required by the Contract but requested by the Contractor, or supplied by those under contract to him, need not be submitted to the Architect and Owner for approval. These shop drawings shall meet all specified shop drawing requirements, except those relating to submission to the Architect and Owner. 2. The Contractor shall reject shop drawings not in conformance with the Contract. Shop drawings shall be complete and detailed. If reviewed by the Architect, each copy of the shop drawings 1.2011 3 General Conditions shall be stamped and dated by the Architect. If review "with exception" or "as noted" by the Architect is so identified, stamped and dated, the Contractor shall comply with notations shown. If the Architect requires resubmission of submittals, the Contractor shall make any corrections at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall not copy Project drawings and use those drawings as submittals. a. Any shop drawing, which does not conform, to the Contract shall be explicitly noted on the drawings and in the transmittal letter. This shall not be construed as approval to proceed with performing or providing the changed work until specifically approved by the Owner and a Change Order accordingly issued. If shop drawings show variations from Contract requirements because of standard shop practice, or for any other reason, such variations shall be explicitly noted in the transmittal letter. Shop drawing review shall be general. It shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for accuracy of such shop drawings, nor for proper fitting, construction of work, furnishing of materials or work required by Contract and not shown on shop drawings. It. The number of copies of shop drawings and other submittals required will be established at the pre - construction conference if more than five are required. The Contractor shall bear cost of reproducing copies of shop drawings required. Instead of prints, a sepia may be required. E. By approving shop drawings and samples, the Contractor determines and certifies that all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data conform to the Contract. The Contractor determines and certifies that he has checked and coordinated each shop drawing and sample with requirements of the Contract. F. No work requiring a shop drawing or sample submission shall be commenced until submission has been approved in writing by the Architect. G. Samples: 1. Where specified or required, the Contractor shall submit samples to the Architect with specification material, affidavits and other documentation as required by the Architect or the Owner. 2. It is the Contractors specific responsibility to ascertain that samples have been checked and approved before being submitted. 3. Cost of samples, including transportation, delivery and any other costs, shall be borne by the Contractor. Unless specified otherwise, samples shall be submitted in triplicate for the Architect, the Owner and the Contractor. The Contractor shall keep his samples on thejobsite. Where samples are specifically required to be submitted for approval, no work involving the sampled materials shall proceed until written approval has been obtained from the Architect. H. Review by the Architect and the Owner: 1. Review of shop drawings by the Architect and the Owner shall not be construed as a complete check, but will show only that the general method of construction and detailing is satisfactory. Review of such drawings will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any error that may exist in the submittals. SECTION 10 - ROYALTIES & PATENTS A. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend and hold the Owner harmless from all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights. SECTION I1 - CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE AND BONDS A. Insurance: 1. The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until he has obtained the insurance required and evidence of such insurance has been submitted to and approved by the Owner. The submittal of said evidence to the Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of the Contractor. a. Workers' Compensation & Employers' Liability Insurance - (1) As required by statute. 1.2011 4 General Conditions b. Commercial General Liability Insurance - ISO Form CG 00 01 (10/93) or equivalent, Occurrence Policy, with - (1) Limits of not less than - (a) General Aggregate $ 2,000,000.00 (b) Products - Comp/OPS Aggregate $ 2,000,000.00 (c) Personal and Advertising Injury $ 1,000,000.00 (d) Each Occurrence $ 1,000,000.00 (e) Fire Damage (any one fire) $ 50,000.00 (f) Medical Expense (any one person) $ 5,000.00 (2) Endorsements attached thereto including the following or their equivalent - (a) ISO Form CG 25 03 (11/85), Amendment of Limits of Insurance (Designated Project or Premises), describing the subject Contract and specifying the limits as shown above. (b) ISO Form CG 20 10 (10/93), Additional Insured -- Owners, Lessees, or Contractors (Form B), naming the Owner as an additional insured and containing the following statement - "This endorsement also constitutes primary coverage in the event of any occurrence, claim, or suit." C. Automobile Liability Insurance, with - (1) Limits of not less than $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit per accident. (2) Coverage applying to any auto. B. Certificate of Insurance, on ACORD 25-S (3/88) Form, or equivalent, filed with the Owner identifying: 1. Owner, as defined in the Construction Contract, as Certificate Holder and Additional Insured. 2. Endorsements, as listed above. (Note: If forms other than ISO forms are used, copies of the non -ISO forms are to be attached to this certificate). 3. Project as defined in the Construction Contract. 4. Cancellation clause of the certificate amended to read, "Should any of the above described policies be canceled before the expiration thereof, the issuing company will mail a notice within thirty (30) days to the certificate holder named." 5. Insurance Companies Providing Coverage - All companies listed must be rated "A-" or better in the Standard and Poor's Solvency Review Guide Property & Casualty (current edition.) 6. The Name, Address, and Telephone Number of The "Producer" - The certificate is to bear an original signature of the Authorized Representative of the Producer. Facsimile or mechanically reproduced signatures will not be accepted. C. Performance Bond and Labor & Material Payment Bond: 1. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner a performance bond, and a labor and a material payment bond each in an amount equal to 100 percent of the Contract sum as security for all obligations arising under the Contract. Such bonds shall - a. Be written on Form AIA Document A312. Where the laws of the state in which the Project is located mandate a statutory payment bond form, such mandated payment bond form shall be used but is to be accompanied by the AIA Document A312 Performance Bond. b. Be issued by a surety company or companies licensed in the state in which the Project is located and holding valid certificates of authority under Sections 9304 to 9308, Title 31, of the United States code as acceptable sureties or reinsurance companies on federal bonds. The penal sum obligation assumed by each surety, shall not exceed the authorization shown in the current revision of Circular #570 as issued by the United States Treasury Department, i.e., "Treasury List." C. Be accompanied by a certified copy of the Power of Attorney stating the authority of the Attorney-in- fact executing the bonds on behalf of the Surety. D. The Owner reserves the right to reject any insurance company, policy, endorsement, certificate of insurance, surety company, performance bond, or labor and material payment bond with or without cause. E. The cost of such insurance and such bonds as required above shall be the obligation of the Contractor. 1.2011 5 General Conditions SECTION 12 - HOLD HARMLESS AGREEMENT A. Besides obtaining insurance coverage as required above, the Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner, the Architect, and their agents and employees harmless from and against any liability, demands, causes of action or claims thereof, whether well founded or otherwise, including the cost of defending the same, for bodily injury to any person whosoever (including the employees of the Owner or the Architect) or damage to property of any person during construction because of the negligence of the Contractor, the subcontractors or materialmen, their agents or employees. B. The Contractor shall be liable to defend the Owner and Architect in any lawsuit filed by any subcontractor or supplier because of the building Project that is the subject matter of this Contract. Where liens have been filed against the Owner's property, this shall include and require the Contractor or his bonding company to obtain lien releases and record them in the appropriate county or local jurisdiction so as to unencumber and provide the Owner with a title free and clear from any liens filed by subcontractors or material suppliers. C. No subcontract shall relieve the Contractor of any of his liability or obligation under the Contract. The Contractor agrees that he is fully responsible to the Owner for acts or omissions of his subcontractors and their materialmen and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them. SECTION 13 - BUILDERS RISK LOSSES A. The Owner will provide Builder's Risk Insurance or reimburse the Contractor for losses to the Project, described herein, to the extent to which such losses are or would be covered by the Owner's American Protection Insurance Company's 'All Risk" insurance policy covering Builders Risk Insurance. Deductible Clause - All claims for loss or expense arising out of one occurrence shall be adjusted as one claim, and from the amount of such adjusted claim, there shall be deducted the sum of: a. $1,000.00 on Projects less than $1,000,000.00. b. $5,000.00 on Projects more than $1,000,000.00. (The deductible amounts are the responsibility of the Contractor or Subcontractor.) 2. Loss Reporting Procedure - All losses requiring reimbursement under this Section shall be reported to the Project Coordinator as soon as practical and always before the beginning of repairs so that details of the loss can be obtained and verified to simplify a prompt loss adjustment. B. Copies of the insurance forms referred to above are available from the Owner at the Brigham Young University Physical Facilities, Construction Section offices. SECTION 14 - PERMITS AND REGULATIONS A. Permits: I. The Contractor shall obtain and the Owner shall pay cost of permits necessary for completion of this work. 2. The Contractor shall notify the Project Coordinator and the local jurisdiction of all inspections and secure certificates of occupancy that may be required by authorities having jurisdiction over the work. The Contractor shall deliver these certificates to the Project Coordinator before execution of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. Regulations 1. The Contractor and others working under his jurisdiction shall do all work according to laws, regulations, and ordinances required by governmental authority or other agencies having jurisdiction over this work. 2. If the Contractor observes that the Contract is in variance with any laws, regulations or ordinances, he shall notify the Project Coordinator and shall not proceed unless necessary changes required for compliance with said laws, regulations and ordinances have been made as provided in the General Conditions, Section 24. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for any work knowingly done contrary to laws, regulations, and ordinances. The Contractor shall fully indemnify the Owner against loss and bear all costs and penalties 12011 6 General Conditions arising from those violations. SECTION 15 - MEASUREMENTS, SURVEYS, BUILDING LAYOUT & SITE EXAMINATION A. The Owner will be responsible for establishment of lot lines and benchmarks. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for 1. Laying out the work hereunder on the building site. 2. The proper observance of property lines and set back requirements. 3. The location and layout of buildings as noted in the drawings with respect to the position on the property and elevation in relation to the grade. C. If existing conditions shown in the Contract differ materially from those the Contractor encounters in the performance of the work, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Architect and the Owner in writing. D. The Architect and the Owner shall promptly investigate the reported differing conditions. If they find that such conditions do materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost or the time required for performance of any part of the work, the Owner shall make an equitable adjustment by Change Order. E. As the work progresses, the Contractor shall lay out on the forms, or floors, the exact locations of all partitions as a guide to all trades. Subcontractors providing work that is to be placed in connection with walls and/or partitions shall check such locations and immediately notify the Contractor of any conflicts in structure or changes necessary to adapt services, utility lines or equipment required by the Contract. Subcontractors and others failing to make such checks and give notice as outlined above shall be required to assume any costs resulting from their failure to do so. F. Before ordering materials or doing work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements to properly size or fit the work. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed by the Owner resulting from the Contractor's failure to comply with this requirement. SECTION 16 - INSPECTION OF WORK A. The Architect and the Project Coordinator shall always have full access to all phases of the work. The Contractor shall provide adequate means to simplify inspection by the Architect and Project Coordinator. 1. The Contractor shall notify the Project Coordinator and local authorities twenty-four (24) hours before doing work that covers or otherwise makes it difficult to inspect structural, plumbing, mechanical or electrical work. 2. Should any of the work be covered without proper notification having been given to the Project Coordinator and local authorities, the Contractor shall uncover that work for inspection at his own ex- pense. 3. The Contractor shall schedule the work so an inspection team may observe and inspect a maximum part of the mechanical, electrical, and plumbing work in operating condition, before it is covered up. This - inspection team will furnish a list of items that must be completed to the satisfaction of the Project Coordinator before the work is concealed. SECTION 17 - SUPERVISION & CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the work under the Contract. The Contractor shall not change superintendents without the written consent of the Owner. SECTION 18 - ARCHITECT'S STATUS AND DECISIONS A. The Architect shall, with assistance from the Project Coordinator ,during the construction period: 1.2011 7 General Conditions I . The Architect will make frequent visits to the site to familiarize himself with the progress and quality of the work and to determine if the work is proceeding according to the Contract and schedule. During periodic visits the Architect may condemn work that fails to conform to the Contract. 2. The Architect shall interpret the conditions of the Contract and be the judge of its performance. He shall use his powers under the Contract to enforce its faithful performance by the Contractor. The Architect will review shop drawings and prepare Job Instructions. The Architect will conduct reviews with the Project Coordinator to determine the dates of substantial completion and final completion. 3. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs concerning the work. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for failure of the Contractor, subcontractor, material supplier or their employees to carry out the work according to the Contract. The Architect's decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with the intent of the Contract. SECTION 19 - MATERIAL & EQUIPMENT A. DELIVERY, STORAGE, & HANDLING I. Materials shall be delivered to the site in original packaging with labels and trademarks intact, and such labels and trademarks shall remain intact until used. All materials, including structural steel and piping, shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 2. The Contractor shall confine his apparatus, storage of materials, and operations of his workers to limits indicated by law, ordinances and permits. The Contractor shall arrange and maintain parking of vehicles and storage of materials within contract limit lines and in an orderly manner leaving all walks, driveways, roads and entrances unencumbered. 3. All equipment on the site shall be protected from physical damage and from the elements by measures satisfactory to the Architect and the Project Coordinator. All rotating equipment shall be rotated four turns weekly during construction. 4. If any material is found not conforming to the Contract, the Contractor shall remove such nonconforming materials at his expense. B. PRODUCT OPTIONS & SUBSTITUTIONS 1. When several materials are specified in the Contract by name for one use, the Contractor may select any one of those so specified. The mixing of different products specified by name for one use is prohibited. 2. Items and material not specified in the Contract and installed in the work shall be removed and replaced by specified items and material at no additional cost to the Owner. No additional time will be added to the Contract for removal or replacement. 3. Wherever words "approved by," "satisfactory to," "submitted to," "inspected by," or similar phrases are used in this specification, they shall be understood to mean that the material or item referred to shall be approved by, be satisfactory to, submitted to, or inspected by the Architect and the Project Coordinator. SECTION 20 - TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES A. TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY I. The Contractor shall arrange with the proper authority (State, County, City, Owner, etc.) for all power required by the Contractor during the construction period until the Certificate of Substantial Completion is issued. The Contractor shall bear all costs for these utilities until final acceptance by the Owner. This shall include costs for installation of all equipment, meters, lines, etc., for the use and maintenance of all utilities. The method of metering, connections, etc., must have the written approval of the body furnishing the utility to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for all utilities needed for his use during the entire construction period. 2. The Contractor shall provide all temporary wiring, outlets, metering, and associated materials. The temporary electrical system shall comply with local codes and Article 305, "Temporary Wiring," of the National Electrical Code. 3. The Contractor shall provide electrical power to distribution centers only. 4. If utility service is available from the Owner's permanent utilities, the Contractor may, by arranging with the Owner and paying for all costs, use these permanent utilities. The Owner assumes no responsibility for 1.2011 8 General Conditions damage caused by the Contractor using any of the Owner's utilities due to interruption of services by the Owner, whatever the cause. 5. If electrical utility service is available from the Owner, the cost to the Contractor will be $.060 per kilowatt- hour. B. TEMPORARY LIGHTING 1. The Contractor shall provide wiring, outlets and fixtures for temporary lighting. 2. The Contractor shall provide pigtails and other lights for all areas within and around the building, sufficient to provide the following intensities: a. All working areas 3 foot candles b. Stairs, landings, ramps 5 foot candles c. Outdoor floodlighting within contract limit lines 3 foot-candles d. All areas involving finish work 30 foot candles C. TEMPORARY HEATING, COOLING & VENTILATING 1. All temporary heating and cooling shall be arranged and paid for by the Contractor. Heating and cooling from the central plant will be charged at $5.00 per million BTUs if available from the Owner. a. Contractor shall install a meter on steam lines to the project. b. Natural gas lines will have a meter installed. Contractor will be charged at current rates. 2. New Additions and New Buildings: a. The Contractor shall be responsible for installation and operation of temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating units including fuel, temporary piping, fittings, wiring, and connections in new additions and new buildings as necessary. b. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to building and contents caused by cold, heat, and dampness. C. The Contractor shall maintain safe conditions for use of temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating systems including, but not limited to, the following: (1) Operate equipment following the manufacturer's instructions. (2) Provide fresh air ventilation required by the equipment manufacturer. (3) Keep temperature of fuel containers stabilized. (4) Secure fuel containers from overturning. (5) Operate equipment away from combustible materials. (6) Provide adequate fire extinguishers. 3. Existing Building: a. Unless otherwise specified, existing facilities may be used, at the Owner's expense, to maintain minimum heating and cooling requirements. Normal setback temperature patterns shall not be interfered with except as specifically required to meet construction requirements. The existing system shall be protected by the Contractor from contamination, construction dust and debris. Filters shall be maintained in a clean condition and replaced with new filters at the completion of construction. 4. Specific heating requirements, unless otherwise specified, include but are not limited to: a. Gypsum Plaster - Uniform minimum temperature of 55 deg F for a week before application of plaster, during plastering operations, and until plaster is dry. b. Gypsum Board - 55 deg F minimum day and night during entirejoint treatment operation and until execution of Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. Ceramic Tile - 50 deg F minimum during preparation of mortar bed, laying of the tile, and for 72 hours after completion of the tile work. d. Acoustical Tile - 70 deg F minimum during setting of the tile. e. Resilient Flooring - 70 deg F minimum during application. f. Painting - 55 deg F minimum during painting operations and until dry. 5. When temporary heating, cooling, or ventilating is no longer required, the Contractor shall dismantle the temporary system and remove it at his own expense. The Contractor shall return permanent mechanical equipment to 'like -new' condition for the Substantial Completion Inspection. All warranties will begin at substantial completion regardless of when the equipment was started. D. TEMPORARY TELEPHONE 1. The Contractor shall install a job telephone at his own expense. Local calls shall be paid for by the Contractor. Long-distance and toll calls shall be paid for by the party making the call. The Project 1.2011 9 General Conditions Coordinator and the Architect shall have free and unrestricted use of this telephone conceming this job. Incoming calls shall be promptly answered during working hours. E. TEMPORARY WATER 1. The Owner will allow the Contractor usage of existing water facilities required for construction. If additional water is needed which cannot be supplied by existing facilities, the Contractor is to pay for installation of all valves, piping and metering, and arrange with the proper authority for connection of the additional water. TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES 1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain sanitary, temporary toilets. 2. The Contractor shall at all times maintain such facilities clean, neat and sanitary. 3. These temporary toilets shall be connected to the sewer wherever possible. 4. Temporary outside toilets shall be removed at completion of the job. G. SCAFFOLDING AND PLATFORMS 1. The Contractor or his subcontractors shall furnish and maintain all equipment such as temporary stairs, ladders, ramps, platforms, scaffolds, hoists, runways, derricks, chutes, elevators, etc., as required for proper execution of the work. 2. All apparatus, equipment, and construction shall meet all requirements of labor laws, safety regulations and other applicable State or local laws. 3. Permanent stairs shall be built whenever needed. The Contractor shall provide temporary treads, handrails, and shaft protection as needed or as required by governing codes. H. TREE & PLANT PROTECTION I. Before commencing site work, the Owner shall build and maintain protective fencing around existing trees and vegetation as identified on the Project drawings. a. Individual trees shall have protective fencing built beyond drip line and to the satisfaction of the Project Coordinator. b. Groups of trees and other vegetation shall have protective fencing built around the entire group to the satisfaction of the Project Coordinator. C. Areas within protective fencing shall remain undisturbed and shall not be used for any purpose. 2. The Contractor shall protect all other trees, shrubs and lawns and all landscape work from damage. Provide guards and covering. If normal sprinkling system is disrupted, the Owner shall hand water all trees and other vegetation affected. 3. Vegetation designated on drawings to be protected that has died or has been damaged beyond repair shall be removed and replaced by the Owner and back charged to the Contractor. TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES I. When walls and roof are in place, the Contractor shall provide temporary, weather tight enclosures for all exterior openings to protect all work from the weather. Openings into existing structure shall be made weatherproof. J. PROTECTION FROM SNOW & ICE I. The Contractor shall remove all snow and ice as may be required for the proper safety, protection and execution of the work. K. BRACING, SHORING, & SHEATHING I. The Contractor shall design, furnish, install, and maintain all shoring, bracing, and sheathing as required for safety and for proper execution of the work and have same removed if required when the work is completed. L. PROTECTION OF PERSONS I . The Contractor shall provide, install, and maintain all necessary precautions to protect all persons on the site, including members of the public, from injury or harm. Such measures shall include: 1.2011 10 Genend Conditions a. Posting of appropriate warning signs in hazardous areas. b. Providing guardrails, fencing and barricades of adequate heights around all openings in floors or roofs, and around all excavations. All guardrails shall meet all applicable codes. C. Providing warning lights around obstructions, pits, trenches, or similar areas on-site or in adjacent streets, roads, sidewalks, or in the structure itself. d. When use or storage of hazardous materials or equipment is necessary for the execution of the work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel. M. PROTECTION FROM WEATHER I. The Contractor shall always provide protection against weather (rain, wind, storm, frost, or heat) and keep all work, materials, apparatus, and fixtures free from damage. At the end of the days work, all work that might be damaged shall be covered. 2. During cold weather, the Contractor shall protect all work from damage. If low temperatures make it impossible to continue operations safely in spite of cold weather precautions, the Contractor shall cease work and so notify the Project Coordinator. N. PROTECTION OF EXISTING WORK 1. The Contractor shall protect all streets, private roads, and sidewalks, including overhead protection where required, and shall make all necessary repairs to damaged work at his own expense. 2. The Contractor shall provide proper protection of all existing work, furnishings, and fixtures likely to be damaged. When exterior openings are made in existing work, they shall be covered with weather tight protection at the end of the days work. 3. Before commencing work, the Contractor shall survey the site and note any damage to existing structures including walks, curbs and utilities. Notify the Project Coordinator before proceeding with work. Any damage not noted by the Contractor and Project Coordinator will be repaired by the Contractor. 4. Any work damaged by failure to provide protection shall be removed and replaced with new work at Contractor's expense. O. FIRE PROTECTION 1. The Contractor shall provide at least one approved fire extinguisher in plain sight on each floor at each usable stairway prior to introduction of any combustible materials into the building. 2. Fires shall not be built on the premises except by express consent of Owner. P. PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PROPERTY 1. The Contractor shall provide all necessary protection and support of adjacent property. Q. CONSTRUCTION CLEANING I. The Contractor shall keep premises broom clean during progress of the work. 2. Remove waste materials and rubbish caused by employees, subcontractors, and installing material men. Roads inside and outside the Project shall be cleaned daily when hauling. 3. Before and during the painting and varnishing, clear area where such work is in progress of all debris, rubbish, and building materials that may cause dust. Sweep floors as required and take all possible steps to keep area dust free. R. SURFACE WATER CONTROL 1. The Contractor shall protect the excavation, trenches and building from water damage by: a. Providing pumps, equipment and enclosures necessary for such protection. b. Constructing and maintaining temporary drainage and pumping as necessary to keep the site free of water. 2. The cost of water control shall be home by the Contractor. The Owner may, if promptly notified of adverse underground water conditions, negotiate reasonable financial relief for the Contractor where such conditions could not have been learned from the Soils Engineer's Report, the Contract, or by commonly known local conditions. S. OFFICES 1.2011 11 General Conditions The Contractor shall provide and maintain a weather tight office at the construction site. This building is to be located outside of, and well detached from the building under construction. This building shall be the property of the Contractor and shall be removed upon completion of the Project. T. SHEDS AND TRAILERS 1. The Contractor shall provide and maintain neat, weather -tight storage sheds or trailers for storage of all materials that might be damaged or affected by weather or moisture. These sheds or trailers shall have wood floors raised above the ground and will be outside of and well detached from the building under construction. They shall be property of the Contractor and shall be removed upon completion of the work. SECTION 21 - TESTING A Testing companies will be selected by the Owner. B. The Owner and/or the Architect reserve the right to have tests made when deemed necessary. C. Tests not specified as part of a trade section shall be paid for by the Owner. D. Should tests reveal a failure of the work to meet Contract requirements, subsequent tests related to the failure shall be paid by the Contractor. E. Tests shall be made according to recognized standards by a competent, independent testing laboratory. Materials found defective or not in conformance with the Contract shall be promptly replaced or repaired at the expense of the Contractor. G. Samples required for testing shall be furnished by the Contractor and selected as directed by the Architect or Project Coordinator. SECTION 22 - CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor shall coordinate all cutting, fitting or patching of work that may be required to make the several parts of the work come together properly. The Contractor shall fit it to receive or to be received by other portions of his own work or that of subcontractors as shown or reasonably implied by the Contract for a completed struc- ture. The Contractor shall make proper repair or closure as the Architect or the Project Coordinator may direct. B. Do not endanger any work by cutting or digging. Do not cut or alter work of any section of the specifications without prior consent of the Architect and the Project Coordinator. The Contractor shall give 48-hour "Blue Stake" notice to Project Coordinator and local "Blue Stakes" location center. The Owner shall perform all utility locates inside Campus boundaries. C. Before arrival of Owner's or Contractor's floor covering installers, the Contractor shall prepare and clean floors in preparation for floor covering. All holes, cracks and other surface irregularities shall be repaired by the Contractor. SECTION 23 - CONDEMNATION OF WORK A. The Owner or the Architect shall have the right to condemn and require removal of the following at the Contractor's expense: 1. Any portions of the work that do not meet the requirements of the Contract either in substance or installation. 2. Any portions of the work damaged or rendered unsuitable through installation or resulting from failure to properly protect the work. SECTION 24 - CHANGES IN THE WORK A. The Owner may make changes within the general scope of the Contract, including but not limited to changes: 1. In the Contract. 1.2011 12 General Conditions 2. In the method or manner of performance of the work. 3. In the Owner -famished facilities, equipment, materials, or site. 4. In directing acceleration of the work. B. Any written order from the Owner or Architect, which changes the scope of the work, shall be a Change Order. C. Architects Supplemental Instruction - 1. The Architect is authorized to order minor changes during the work that will not involve extra cost or time. The Architect, with the concurrence of the Project Coordinator, is authorized to order on -the -spot minor changes to avoid delaying the work. The price of such minor changes will be mutually agreed upon between the Project Coordinator and the Contractor and recorded on a Job Instruction form. The Contractor will proceed with the changed work immediately. These minor architect's supplemental instructions will subsequently be included in a Change Order. D. Proposal Request - 1. Proposal Requests may be issued which ask the Contractor to provide a price for changes in the scope of the work. The Contractor is to promptly provide costs associated with the changes, including credits for deleting work. Cost breakdowns are to be submitted in sufficient detail to verify that the complete scope of the work is understood by the Contractor, Architect and Project Coordinator. F. Change Orders - 1. Except for emergencies as covered in Section 8, and to avoid delays, no changes in the work shall be made without a written Change Order. The Contractor's proposal shall be the basis of negotiation for the Change Order price and/or time adjustments. 2. If the Owner decides it is necessary to proceed with changed work to avoid delay before prices or times have been negotiated, he may order the Contractor to proceed on a time and materials basis or on a mutually agreed not -to -exceed price and time extension. This notice to proceed shall be by Job Instruction by the Owners Representative. Upon receipt of such order, the Contractor shall immediately perform the changed work. The Owner and the Contractor will then negotiate the price and/or time when practicable, and a Change Order will be issued. G. When submitting proposals for Change Orders, the Contractor shall famish a price breakdown itemizing costs as required by the Owner. Unless otherwise directed, the breakdown shall be in sufficient detail to allow an analysis of all material, labor, equipment, overhead costs and profit, and shall cover all work involved in the change, whether such work was deleted or added. Any amount claimed for subcontractors shall be supported by a similar price breakdown. In addition, if the proposal includes a time extension, ajustification shall be furnished. The proposal, with the price breakdown and time extension justification, shall be furnished within fourteen (14) days of the date that the first request was made by the Owner's Representative. 1. In such proposals, profit and overhead shall be computed as follows: a. The Subcontractor's profit and overhead shall not exceed 15% of total direct costs. b. The Contractor's profit and overhead on work done by his own crews shall not exceed 15% of total direct costs. C. The Contractor's profit and overhead on work performed by subcontractors shall not exceed 5% of total direct costs. d. The subcontractor's profit and overhead on work performed by any of his subcontractors shall not exceed 5% of total direct costs. Contractor's profit and overhead will not exceed 5% of those costs. e. On credit changes, profit and overhead on the originally estimated work will not have to be returned to the Owner. f. No supervision costs, office managerial costs or office expenses can be added to Change Orders. H. Upon signing a Change Order, the Contractor releases the Owner from any further claim for money or time because of the changed work. SECTION 25 - CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST A. If the Contractor intends to assert any additional claim for equitable adjustment of cost or time, he must, within fourteen (14) calendar days of such events or circumstances, submit to the Architect and the Owner a written 1.2011 13 General Conditions statement of the nature and monetary extent of such claim. If a mutually acceptable settlement of the claim cannot be reached within a reasonable time, the parties to the Contract shall handle the matter as a dispute under Section 27 "DISPUTES." SECTION 26 - DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME A. All time limits stated in the Contract are of the essence. B. If the Contractor is delayed any time during the progress of the work because of labor disputes, abnormal weather, unusual delays in transportation, or any other causes beyond the Contractor's control, the Contractor may be given additional time to complete the work by Change Order. I. All requests for time extensions shall be made in writing to the Project Coordinator. a. Claims for time extension due to abnormal weather shall be made within fourteen (14) days of the abnormal weather. b. Claims made beyond these time limits shall be void. 2. Requests for time extensions shall be fully documented by including copies of daily logs, letters, shipping orders, delivery tickets and other supporting information. 3. In case of a continuing cause of delay only one claim is necessary. SECTION 27 - DISPUTES A. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, any dispute concerning a question of fact arising under this Contract that is not disposed of by agreement shall be decided by the Owner's Representative (as represented by the University Operations Managing Director/Brigham Young University -Idaho). The decision shall be rendered in writing and mailed or otherwise given to the Contractor. If the decision is not agreeable to the Contractor, the Contractor will, within fourteen (14) days of the decision, mail or otherwise furnish to the Owner's Representative a written appeal addressed to the Architect. The decision of the Architect shall be final and conclusive as far as the Owner is concerned. SECTION 28 - CORRECTION& WARRANTY OF WORK A. The Contractor shall promptly correct any work that fails to conform to the requirements of the Contract during the progress of the work. The Contractor shall remedy any defects due to faulty materials, equipment or construction that appears within one year from substantial completion of the Contract or within such longer periods as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract. The Contractor shall promptly correct all faulty work or pay all costs of correcting the faulty work. SECTION 29 - OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK A. If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the work according to the Contract or fails to perform any provision of the Contract, the Owner may, after providing seven days written notice to the Contractor and without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies. In such case, an appropriate Change Order will be issued deducting from the payments then or after that due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including the cost of the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. If the payments then or after that due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The Architect must concur with both such action and the amount charged to the Contractor. SECTION 30 - CONTRACTOR'S PAY REQUEST A. The Contractor shall submit to the Project Coordinator a monthly payment request based on the estimated value of the work completed and materials on the site as of that date. The payment request shall be on a form provided by the Project Coordinator. Such estimates shall be based on the schedule of values submitted by the Contractor. The Contractor warrants that title to all work, materials and equipment covered by the payment request, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner upon the receipt of such payment by the Contractor, free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances. The Project Coordinator may audit Contractor payments to subcontractors or suppliers anytime during the Project. 1.2011 14 General Conditions SECTION 31 - PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR A. Upon approval of the Contractor's monthly payment request, the Owner will, within fourteen (14) days after receipt of said certification, mail to the Contractor a sum equal to 95% of the amount requested, less previous payment thereon. B. Upon receipt of a payment by the Owner, the Contractor shall pay each subcontractor within fourteen (14) calendar days, the amount allowed to the Contractor for the subcontractor's work. C. The Contractor's monthly estimate, which shall show the amount paid under the subcontract, shall be made available to the Project Coordinator for examination. Full and final payment of the Contract sum shall be made within thirty (30) days of the completion of the following requirements: 1. The Architect's and Owner's written acceptance of the work. 2. Payment of all labor and material bills, and receipt of all final lien waivers or lien releases from all subcontractors, mechanics and suppliers. 3. No payment made under this Contract, either wholly or in part, shall be construed to be an acceptance of defective or improper materials or construction. E. A schedule of dollar values shall be submitted to the Architect and the Owner not less than fourteen (14) days before first payment request, and shall be a condition precedent to processing the first payment. F. The schedule of values shall be submitted on the Owner's standard payment request form. 1. This breakdown shall follow the trade divisions of the specification. Each item there under shall include its pro rata part of overhead and profit so that the sum of the items will equal the Contract price. 2. The breakdown will correspond exactly to items of work in the Project schedule including work of sub contractors. SECTION 32 - PAYMENTS WITHHELD A. Payments may be withheld from the Contractor by the Owner to protect the Owner from loss due to: I. Defective work not remedied. 2. Liens or claims filed or reasonable evidence of probable filing. 3. The Contractor's failure to promptly pay subcontractors for labor and materials accepted by the Contractor. 4. The Architect's or the Project Coordinator's reasonable doubt that the Project can be completed for the j unpaid balance of the Contract price. 5. Damage to another contractor. 6. Failure to maintain scheduled progress. B. Upon satisfactory correction of the above conditions, withheld payments will be made. SECTION 33 - CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor is fully responsible for the Project and all materials and work until the Owner has accepted the completed Project in writing. The Contractor shall replace or repair, at his own expense, any materials or work damaged or stolen even if the Contractor has received payment for the work or materials. B. By executing the Contract, the Contractor represents that he has visited the site, familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the work is to be performed, and correlated his observations with the requirements of the Contract. C. The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent satisfactory to the Architect and the Owner. The superintendent shall be present at the Project site during the progress of the work. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the prior consent of the Project Coordinator, unless the superintendent ceases to be in the Contractors employment. The replacement superintendent shall also be subject to these conditions. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and all communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. 1.2011 15 General Conditions D. The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor to the Owner and the Architect. E. The Contractor shall forward all communications to the Project Coordinator. F. Unless otherwise directed, the Contractor shall, within two (2) hours after the bid opening, furnish the Architect and the Owner a list of the proposed subcontractors who will be working on the Project. The Owner will notify the Contractor in writing if any of the listed subcontractors are unacceptable. G. The Contractor shall not contract with any subcontractor who has been rejected by the Owner or the Architect. The Contractor will not be required to contract with any subcontractor, person or organization against whom he has a reasonable objection if such objection is made before the bid opening. The Contractor is not to use or accept any bid from a subcontractor unless the Contractor is willing and able to work with that subcontractor. H. If the Owner or the Architect requires a change of any proposed subcontractor or person or organization previously accepted by them, the Contract sum shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued. The Contractor shall not make any substitution of a subcontractor who has been accepted by the Owner and the Architect unless the substitution is accepted in writing by the Owner and the Architect. J. All damage or loss to any property caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, any subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable, shall be remedied by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. K. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating and supervising all safety programs including, but not limited to: 1. All persons on the site, including the public. 2. All conditions specified in this contract. 3. All conditions required by codes and/or governmental regulations including OSHA. SECTION 34 - SUBCONTRACTORS A. The Contractor's responsibility for this Project includes the work of all subcontractors and material men, including those recommended or approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall be held responsible to the Owner for proper completion and guarantee of all construction and materials under subcontracts and for the acts and omissions of his subcontractors or their employees. Any warranties required for such work shall be obtained by the Contractor in favor of the Owner and delivered to the Owner. It is expressly understood and agreed that there is no contractual relationship between the Owner and any subcontractor, and under no circumstances shall the Owner be responsible for the nonperformance or financial failure of any subcontractor. B. The Contractor shall require each subcontractor to agree: 1. To be bound by terms of the Contract as far as applicable to his work. 2. To assume toward the Contractor the same obligations the Contractor has assumed toward the Owner, including the prompt payment of his employees and material men affected by this work. 3. To submit his applications for payment to the Contractor in time to allow the Contractor to make timely application to the Owner. 4. To execute claim or lien releases or lien waivers as requested by the Contractor for payments made by the Contractor. 5. To make all claims for extra work done or for extensions of time to the Contractor in the same manner the Contractor is to make this type of claim to the Owner. C. The Contractor agrees in his relationship with the subcontractors: I . To bind himself to the subcontractors by all the obligations that the Owner assumes to the Contractor. 2. To pay the subcontractors within fourteen (14) calendar days upon receipt of payment from the Owner that 1.2011 16 General Conditions portion of the funds received as represents the subcontractor's portion of the work completed to the Contractor's satisfaction for which payment was made by the Owner. SECTION 35 - LOCKOUT/TAGOUT, CONFINED SPACE AND HAZARD COMMUNICATION PROGRAMS A. The Contractor and the subcontractors will have a written "Lockouv7agout" program. A copy of this program will be submitted to the Project Coordinator. B. The Contractor and the subcontractors will inform their employees of the Owner's Lockoutlfagout Program. Copies of this program are available from the Project Coordinator. C. The Contractor and subcontractors shall evaluate all work places to determine if any spaces are permit -required - confined spaces. (See 29 CFR 1910.146, Appendix A, Decision Flow Chart.) If the workplace contains permit spaces, the Contractor shall inform exposed employees by posting danger signs. (NOTE: A sign reading DANGER --PERMIT REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE, DO NOT ENTER, or similar language would satisfy this requirement.) If the Contractor decides that its employees will enter permit spaces, the Contractor shall carry out a written confined space program. The written program shall be made available to exposed employees and submitted to the Project Coordinator. The confined space program shall inform the employee that the workplace contains confined spaces that require a permit to enter those spaces. The Contractor shall identify the hazards that may be encountered in the confined space. The Contractor shall specify any precautions or procedures required for the protection of employees in or near confined spaces. D. Besides complying with the confined space requirements that apply to all employers, the Contractor shall: 1. Obtain any available information regarding permit space hazards and entry operations. 2. Coordinate entry operations when both contractor and subcontractor personnel will be working in or near permit spaces. E. Copies of the Owner's Confined Space Program are available from the Project Coordinator. The Contractor shall inform the Project Coordinator of the methods they will use to inform all employees on the site of any precautionary measures that need to be taken for protection during the workplace's normal and emergency operating conditions. The Contractor will specify the methods to inform the employees of the labeling system for hazardous materials. The Contractor may rely on an existing hazard communication program to comply with these requirements if it is current with OSHA regulations. G. The employer shall make the written hazard communication program available to employees and the Project Coordinator. H. Copies of the Owner's Hazard Communication Program are available from the Project Coordinator. SECTION 36 - OWNER'S RIGHT TO CANCEL CONTRACT A. The Contractor shall give the Owner at least twenty-one (21) calendar days' written notice before filing any petition for bankruptcy. The Contractor shall be in material breach of the Contract if the Contractor fails to give this notice. B. Should the Contractor make a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors, or if he should persistently refuse or fail to apply enough properly -skilled workers or proper materials to correctly execute the work, or if he should fail to make prompt payment to the subcontractors or material men for accepted material or labor, or constantly disregard laws, ordinances or instructions of the Architect and the Owner, or otherwise be guilty of substantial violation of any provision of the Contract, then the Owner may, without any prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the Contractor seven (7) days written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and all materials, tools and appliances thereon, and finish the work by whatever method the Owner deems expedient. In such case, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract price exceeds the expense of finishing the work, 1.2011 17 Genend Conditions including compensation for additional administrative services, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such expense shall exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. SECTION 37 - CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE CONTRACT A. If the work should be stopped under an order of any court, or other public authority for thirty (30) days, or the Owner shall fail to pay the Contractor within thirty (30) days of receipt of a properly prepared and completed payment request, then the Contractor may, on seven (7) days written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate this Contract and recover from the Owner the percentage of the Contract price represented by the work completed as of the date of termination with any loss sustained which can be established. SECTION 38 - SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. The Owner reserves the right to award separate contracts concerning other portions of the Project under these or similar conditions of the Contract to other contractors. B. The Contractor shall afford separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall properly connect and coordinate his work with theirs. C. If any part of the Contractor's work depends upon the work of another separate contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Project Coordinator any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it unsuitable for proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor to inspect the work is an acceptance of the work of the separate contractor unless defects develop in the other separate contractor's work after the execution of the Contractor's work. SECTION 39 - ASSIGNMENT A. The Contractor shall not assign or sublet this Contract or any part of it or any monies due him without prior written consent of the Owner. SECTION 40 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. For each calendar day the work, or any portion that remains incomplete after the expiration of the time limit set in the Contract or by Change Order, the amount per calendar day shown in the Supplementary Conditions will be deducted from the money due or to become due to the Contractor, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages and added expense including administrative and inspection cost. B. At the time of substantial completion, and after the meeting to certify substantial completion, the Owner, Architect and Contractor shall agree upon the time that will be allowed for the Contractor to complete the remaining work on the Project. If the Contractor does not complete the work within the agreed time, the liquidated damages will continue at a reduced amount as stated in the Supplementary Conditions. The liquidated damages shall be in full force and effect, not as a penalty but as liquidated damages for each additional calendar day it takes to complete the Project. If liquidated damages are required, they shall be accrued and deducted from the money due the Contractor. SECTION 41 - ACCELERATION OF WORK A. If, in thejudgment of the Architect or the Owner, it becomes necessary at any time to accelerate the work or part of it, the Contractor shall deploy the workers in such portions of the Project to enable others to properly engage and carry on their work. If circumstances require that the entire work or a portion of it be completed at a date earlier than the Contract completion date as adjusted by Change Orders, the Contractor shall increase his forces, equipment, hours of work, or number of shifts, and shall speed delivery of materials to meet the altered completion date or dates ordered or directed. Any increase in cost to the Contractor according to such orders or directives will be adjusted by Change Order. 1.2011 18 General Conditions B. If the work is behind schedule and the rate of placement of work is inadequate to regain scheduled progress, the Contractor shall immediately take action to ensure timely completion of the work. 1. This shall be accomplished by any one or a combination of the following or other suitable measures: a. An increase in working forces. b. An increase in equipment or tools. C. An increase in hours of work or number of shifts. d. Expediting delivery of materials. 2. The Contractor shall notify the Project Coordinator of specific measures taken or planned to increase the rate of progress with an estimate of when scheduled progress will be regained. 3. Acceleration of work will continue until scheduled progress is regained. Scheduled progress shall be established from the latest revised and approved Project schedule for thejob. 4. Timely completion will be understood as the Contract completion date as revised by all time extensions. 5. The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation for efforts to regain scheduled progress. SECTION 42 - CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL A. MATERIAL QUALITY 1. Materials incorporated into the Project shall be new except as otherwise indicated in the specifications. Materials shall be of specified quality and furnished in sufficient quantity to simplify proper and timely execution of the work. 2. The Contractor shall famish evidence of the quality of materials incorporated into the Project as required by the Contract or at request of the Architect or the Project Coordinator. 3. Materials not meeting requirements of the Contract shall be removed from the Project and replaced with materials meeting the Contract requirements by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. B. ASBESTOS 1. The Contract has been prepared following generally accepted professional architectural and engineering practices. Accordingly, no asbestos or products containing asbestos have been knowingly specified for this Project. Notify the Project Coordinator immediately for instructions if: a. Materials containing asbestos are brought to the site for inclusion in the work. b. Asbestos materials are encountered in any existing structures upon which work is being done. 2. At the Architect's direction and with the Owner's approval, an independent testing laboratory will perform testing procedures on suspect materials at Owner's expense. 3. The Contractor shall certify, based upon his best knowledge, information, inspection and belief, that no building materials containing asbestos was used in the construction of the Project. Submit certification on form provided by the Owner. SECTION 43 - TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE OF ANY MECHANICAL DEVICES A. Temporary or trial usage by the Owner of mechanical devices, machinery, apparatus, equipment or other work or materials supplied under this Contract before written acceptance by the Owner shall not be construed as evidence of the Owner's acceptance. SECTION 44 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. FINAL CLEANING 1. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials and all rubbish from under and about the building. The Contractor shall leave the building clean and habitable, having thoroughly swept or vacuumed floors, cleaned windows and dusted flat surfaces such as cabinet tops and windowsills. 2. Besides general cleaning noted above, the Contractor shall do the following special cleaning for all trades at the completion of the work: 1.2011 19 General Conditions a. Remove putty or caulking stains from glass. Wash and polish inside and outside, exercising care not to scratch glass. b. Remove marks, stains, fingerprints, other soil and dirt from painted, decorated and stained work. C. Clean and polish woodwork. d. Clean and polish hardware for all trades. This shall include removal of stains, dust, dirt, paint and other similar materials. e. Remove spots, soil and paint. Wash tile work. f. Clean fixtures and equipment, and remove stains, paint, dirt and dust. g. Remove temporary floor protection and clean floors. Spray buff resilient flooring. h. Clean exterior and interior metal surfaces, including doors and windows, required to have polished finishes. Remove oils, stains, dust, and dirt. Polish surfaces, leaving them without fingerprints or other blemishes. 3. If the Contractor fails to clean up, the Owner may do so and the cost will be withheld from the Contractor's final payment. B. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1. The Contractor shall deliver to the Architect before the substantial completion inspection: a. Accurate "Record" drawings. b. Certificates of occupancy that may be required by authorities having jurisdiction over the work. C. OPERATING & MAINTENANCE DATA 1. Before execution of the certificate of substantial completion, the Contractor shall furnish the operating instructions and maintenance manuals as called for in the Contract. D. WARRANTIES & GUARANTEES 1. When written guarantees beyond one year after substantial completion are required of any section of the work, the Contractor shall secure such guarantees properly addressed and signed and in favor of the Owner. These documents shall be delivered to the Project Coordinator upon substantial completion of the Contractor's work and before execution of the certificate of substantial completion. 2. Delivery of guarantees and warranties shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation assumed under any other provisions of his contract. 3. Nothing within the Contract intends or implies that guarantees shall apply to work abused or neglected by the Owner. E. PRE -SUBSTANTIAL, SUBSTANTIAL, & FINAL COMPLETION INSPECTIONS 1. Pre -Substantial Completion Inspection: a. Upon the Contractor's request and if the request is accompanied by a punch list prepared by the Contractor, the Project Coordinator and the Architect will make inspections and furnish a list of additional items to be corrected or completed by the Contractor. b. The Contractor shall notify the Project Coordinator when items have been corrected or completed. Upon the Project Coordinator's verification of correction, the Project Coordinator will arrange a substantial completion inspection to include the Owner, Architect, engineers and college representatives. 2. Substantial Completion Inspection: a. At the substantial completion inspection, unless the work is rejected, the Owner, Architect, and Contractor will execute a certificate of substantial completion that states the dates for: (1) User occupancy, (2) Commencement of warranties, (3) Final completion inspection, (4) Modifications to the amount assessed for liquidated damages. b. After inspection, the Architect will furnish a final list of items to be corrected. C. The Owner, Architect and Contractor will decide how much time is to be allowed for completion of the items. 3. Final Completion Inspection: a. Final Completion Inspection will ensure that all deficiencies noted at the substantial completion inspection have been corrected. b. When all items have been corrected, the Project Coordinator will process the final payment. 1.2011 20 General Conditions C. If all items have not been corrected as agreed, the Owner may elect to complete the work under provisions of Section 29 of the General Conditions. d. All lien waivers and releases are to be submitted before final payment can be made. SECTION 45 - OWNER -PURCHASED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. The Owner desires to purchase certain materials, which will be utilized in the work. Contractor's duties with respect to Owner -purchased materials are: 1. Scheduling. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a schedule of dates on which the Contractor requires delivery of Owner -purchased materials. The Owner will arrange for the materials to be delivered to the construction site on or before the specified dates. If delivery dates are changed, rescheduled, or otherwise varied from the original schedule, the Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing of delivery date rescheduling and the Contractor shall coordinate the delivery of the Owner -purchased materials directly with the supplier or material man. 2. Pre -Installation Inspection. The Contractor shall be responsible for receiving, inspecting and storing all Owner -purchased materials until they are needed for installation by the Contractor. Regardless of any inspection performed by the Owner of the Owner -purchased materials, the Contractor shall be responsible for inspecting the Owner -purchased materials to determine suitability, quality and conformance with specifications before installation or at such other time as the Contractor may desire in order to avoid interruptions and delays in the progress of the Project. The Contractor shall reject any material which does not meet specifications or which appears to have any defect, which may make the material unsuitable for use in the Project. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and the manufacturer or supplier of all defects and assist the Owner in arranging for the repair, replacement or correction of the defective condition. The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of any deadline or completion date, which results from failure to discover defects, which the Contractor should have discovered through an inspection. 3. Defective Materials. The Contractor acknowledges that use of improper or defective material may result in costs and damages to the Owner in excess of the value of the materials; that after use in the Project it may be difficult or impossible to inspect the material to determine the cause of any failure; and that in the event of the failure of material there may be a question as to the cause of the failure. Because the Contractor's employees will be the last to handle and inspect material prior to incorporation into the Project, the Contractor will be liable to the Owner for damages resulting from failure of Owner -purchased materials during the Contractor's warranty period specified herein from any cause whatsoever unless the Contractor provides clear and convincing proof that (1) the entire loss from a failure is covered by a valid manufacturer's or supplier's warranty, or (2) the Contractor could not have prevented the failure by complying with the requirements of this Section concerning Owner -purchased materials. 4. Claims. The Contractor agrees to assist the Owner to present claims to manufacturers and suppliers for defects in Owner -purchased materials. Where there is any question as to the division of liability between the Contractor and a manufacturer or vendor, the Contractor shall provide all relevant information in the Contractor's possession, which may aid the Owner in determining the division of responsibility. The Owner shall have final approval of any proposed adjustment or settlement of warranty claims. 5. Implied Warranties. The benefit of contractual and implied warranties with respect to Owner -purchased materials shall run to the Owner and not to the Contractor. 6. Unloading. Except as otherwise provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for unloading all Owner -purchased materials and verifying delivery amounts to the Owner. 7. Custody and Security. The Contractor shall use reasonable care in protecting Owner -purchased materials from loss, deterioration, damage, theft, vandalism or destruction. 8. Reports. At Owner's request, the Contractor shall furnish reports to the Project Coordinator demonstrating the Contractor's compliance with this Section. 9. Retained Ownership. All materials purchased by the Owner which remain after completion of the Project shall be the property of the Owner. If the Owner does not wish to retain or dispose of surplus Owner - purchased materials, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of them. 10. Rights of Ownership. None of the foregoing duties of the Contractor with respect to Owner -purchased materials shall prevent the Owner from exercising any prerogative of ownership of the materials. 1.2011 21 General Conditions 9 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1.1 - COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION & COMPLETION OF THE WORK A. The Contractor shall be required to commence work 14 April 2011 or promptly after receipt of the contract from the Owner. B. The Contractor shall prosecute the work diligently so as to complete it within the time limit allowed in this document. C. The Contractor agrees to complete this work required by the Contract on or before midnight 26 August 2011. D. Time is hereby expressly declared to be of the essence of the Contract. 1.2 - LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. The amount agreed upon and established as liquidated damages up to substantial completion is $300.00 per calendar day. B. At the time of substantial completion the Owner and the Contractor will agree on how much time will be allowed for the Contractor to complete the remaining work. If the Contractor exceeds the time allowed, liquidated damages will continue at one third (1/3) of the amount of the original liquidated damages of $300.00 per calendar day. 10/6/99 1 Supplementary Conditions SPECIAL INSPECTIONS GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 TESTING FIRM'S SRVICES 1.1 ESSENTIAL SERVICES REQUIRED: 1.1.1 Services will consist of field and laboratory quality control testing services on BYU-Idaho Projects as circumstances, special qualifications, or Building Codes (Chapter 17) may require. 1.1.2 The types of services required may be anticipated to be soils tests pertaining to compaction, concrete, quality control, special masonry inspection, visual welding inspection, structural steel and bolting inspection, spray on fireproofing, and asphalt paving quality control and all other tests that may become necessary and as listed in your proposal. 1.1.3 The ability to respond to calls for testing, with 24 hours notice, is required. 1.2 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITIES: 1.2.1 The TESTING FIRM agrees to endeavor to strictly conform to and be bound by budgetary considerations and memoranda of policy furnished to it by the OWNER and further agrees to perform work in strict compliance with all applicable laws, codes and industry standards. 1.2.2 The TESTING FIRM agrees to provide qualified and/or certified technicians for the performance of the work under this agreement. 1.2.3 The TESTING FIRM will produce written test results and distribute them per OWNER instructions. Test results shall be available within 24 hours of the test performed. 1.2.4 The TESTING FIRM will provide general liability insurance in the amount of $1,000,000. 1.2.5 All testing requested by the Contractor for his use and convenience is not part of the Agreement. 1.2.6 The TESTING FIRM will furnish to the OWNER documentation for all failed tests and their associated costs. 4/2009 Special Inspections General Conditions ARTICLE 2 THE OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES 2.1 The OWNER shall provide full information regarding the testing requirements for each project. Testing Services will be described for each separate project, including the name and location of the project, the testing services' budget, and the testing services' schedule, and the name of the OWNER's representative, in an Authorization to Proceed, issued by the OWNER. 2.2 The OWNER shall designate a representative authorized to act in his behalf with respect to the project. Coordinate your testing services through the contact person listed on the Authorization To Proceed. 2.3 The OWNER shall furnish required information required as expeditiously as necessary for the orderly progress of the work and the TESTING FIRM shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness thereof. ARTICLE 3 PAYMENTS TO THE TESTING FIRM 3.1 Payments under this agreement shall be made bi-monthly upon presentation of the TESTING FIRM's statement of services rendered. 3.2.1 The TESTING FIRM's statement of services shall follow the outline of the Proposal dated ???, including any amendments to the proposal. Submit one (1) original. Include an itemized statement including names of employees, hours worked and hourly rates, and/or the amount of each test. ARTICLE 4 TESTING FIRM'S ACCOUNTING RECORDS 4.1 Records of the TESTING FIRM's time, consultants, and reimbursable expenses pertaining to the project shall be kept on a generally recognized accounting basis and shall be available to the OWNER upon request. 4/2009 Special Inspections General Conditions ARTICLE 5 TERMINATION OF AGREEMENT 5.1 This Agreement may be terminated by either party upon ten (10) days' written notice should the other parry fail substantially to perform in accordance with its terms through no fault of the other. In the event of termination due to fault of others than the TESTING FIRM, the TESTING FIRM shall be paid for its time, cost of materials, plus allowable expenses for services performed to termination date. ARTICLE 6 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 6.1 The OWNER and the TESTING FIRM, respectively, bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party to this Agreement and to the partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party with respect to all covenants of this Agreement. Neither the OWNER nor the TESTING FIRM shall assign, sublet or transfer any interest in this Agreement. 4/2009 Special Inspections General Conditions F- 0 O W r 0 0 0 z 0 Q a r z z 0 0 0 00 J J O >N> w CL 6a. w W W ¢ ¢ a m m 3 d o w c N r J � N ¢ Z N v c p O y 0 3 +d r W O Z N d' C W r C N O O .J. w wco (rr aci f m to W w c d m U Or W W d W to N N Z m 7 J O w 0 M W E L U C7 r o Z g w o. r U O Ww p K Z W c a U U 0 3 Z U K J J d W Z d w O O N r w 0 a o O z U r w U U of ni v L6 6 r ro 6 w U x ¢ m .MMA Q I j; i. I j; SOV SCHEDULE OF VALUES Job: Date: Spec # Description % Comp. Scheduled Change Order Revised Previous This Total Balance to Value Contract Months Month Earned Complete Totals Page 1 of 1 I CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 01 0000 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general requirements that are to apply to all Work throughout the Project. Requirements included in this Section are to apply to all other specification Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Center of..": Indicates a specific single point at the exact center of the surface indicated. C. Conforms": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "conforms" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. D. "Contractor": The General Contractor unless otherwise stated. E. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect, unless indicated as by Owner. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," _ noted, scheduled, and specified have the same meaning as indicated. H. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. I. "Project Manager": The Contractor's project manager. J. "Project Representative": The Owner's project representative(s). 09070 (3/18/11) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 0000 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO K. 'Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. L. 'Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. M. 'Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. N. "Related Sections": Related Sections articles are included herein as a courtesy to assist in the locating of items in the specifications that the reader might expect to find in the Section but that are specified elsewhere. The list of sections may or may not be complete. `Related Sections' articles do not relieve the Contractor of the contractual obligation to perform to all the Contract Documents or to coordinate who does what amongst the team of subcontractors. 1.4 SITE INSPECTION A. Examine the premises and site and compare them with the drawings and specifications. B. Become familiar with existing conditions such as obstructive areas, excavating or filling, and any problems related to construction. No allowances will subsequently be made by reason of failure to examine the site. 1.5 SCOPE OF THE WORK A. See Division 01 Section "Summary" for an overall general summary of the Work. B. Unless otherwise provided, all materials, labor, equipment, tools, transportation, and utilities necessary for the successful completion of the Project shall be provided at the expense of the Contractor. C. Requirements of the Work are contained in the Contract Documents, and include cross- references herein to published information, which is not necessarily bound therewith. D. Provide, as part of the Bid and without additional charge, all incidental items required for completion of the Work, even if not specifically indicated. Install all Work so that its several component parts function together as a complete and workable system, and with all equipment properly adjusted and in working order. E. Conform to highest quality standards for materials and workmanship to execute Work that is indicated or specified and that is necessary to fully satisfy the Contract Document requirements for a complete, finished, acceptable installation regardless of whether indicated or specified or not. F. Responsibilities of the Contractor includes the responsibility to verify all field measurements of actual building conditions so that all Work fits properly in the locations indicated and specified. 09070 (3/18/11) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIG14AM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO Protect existing structures, improvements, trees, and other items from physical damage, unless identified to be removed. G. Any existing surfaces, furniture or equipment that are damaged by the Contractor are to be restored to their original condition, or better, to the satisfaction of the Owner. H. Contractor is to restore roads, utilities, walks, curbs, gutters or other improvements belonging to the Owner, to the same condition as they existed prior to commencement of construction. Where said improvements are damaged, they shall be replaced by new Work to match existing adjacent Work, or repaired if acceptable to Project Representative, at no cost to Owner. 1.6 WORKERS A. The Contractor is to enforce strict discipline and good order among his/her employees at all times and shall not employ on the Project any unfit person or anyone not skilled in the Work assigned to him/her. B. Consumption of alcohol or any other controlled, non -medically prescribed substance will not be allowed on the Project. C. Contractor shall rectify behavior unacceptable to the Owner or Owner's Project Representative by strict enforcement of discipline. Owner reserves the right to request dismissal of individual workers for failure to comply with standards of behavior communicated to the Contractor. 1.7 TAXES A. The Contractor shall pay sales, use, payroll, unemployment, old age pension, or surtax applicable to this project. B. The Owner shall pay taxes and assessments on real property comprising the site of this project. 1.8 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. Manufactured articles, materials, or equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with the Manufacturer's printed directions unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 1.9 FASTENERS A. Unless noted otherwise, the trade requiring the fastening of its Work to any substrate or support is responsible for provision and installation of requisite fasteners. 09070 (3/18/11) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION O1 1000 09070 (3/18/11) GENERAL REQUIREMENTS O1 0000-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION O1 1000 -SUMMARY PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Use of premises. 4. Owner's occupancy requirements. 5. Work restrictions. B. Related Sections include the following: Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Identification: Central Quad. 1. Project Location: Brigham Young University — Idaho; Rexburg Idaho. 2. FFKR Project number # 09070. B. Owner: Brigham Young University — Idaho. 1. Owner's representative: Kehl Murray. C. Architect: FFKR Architects, Bogue Building, 730 Pacific Avenue, Salt Lake City, Utah, 84104. D. The Work consists of the following: The Work includes selective demolition at the existing site improvements, excavation as required to accommodate new site work, and construction of new retaining walls, planters, and steel and wood trellis structure. 09070 (3/18/11) SUMMARY O1 1000-1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 USE OF PREMISES A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits. B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public. Confine constructions operations to construction limits indicated on Drawings. Do not disrupt normal operations in adjacent buildings or portions of buildings indicated to remain. Operations not to be disrupted include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Emergency vehicle access. b. Public transportation access. C. Access for building waste removal. d. Access for building deliveries. e. Access to exits and entrances for building patrons and the public. f. Utilities and other services to the building. 2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. 1.6 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. 3. Warranties, guarantees, etc. become effective at time of completion of final punch list. 09070 (3/18/11) SUMMARY 01 1000-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION O1 1000 09070 (3/18/11) SUMMARY O1 1000-3 . _�. p,f, ;'[ CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SECTION O1 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. 4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field -engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Allow Architect minimum of 5 working days to respond to RFI's. a. Complex RFI's may take more time to respond. Architect reserves the right to add up to 15 more working days with written (email) notification to the contractor. b. Urgent BFI's: Where RFI is required by the Contractor to be reviewed within a shorter period of time than specified, contact Architect prior to RFI. Architect will make an effort to accommodate the Contractor. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 09070 (3/18/11) PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Content: Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. 09070 (3/18/11) PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO b. Indicate required installation sequences. C. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. 2. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy. a. Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing. b. Submit, in addition to opaque copy, a copy of all submittals electronically in PDF format. I) Opaque copy of submittal may be omitted if PDF is deemed sufficient by Architect. 3. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 09070 (3/18/11) PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long -lead items. C. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for RFIs. f. Procedures for testing and inspecting. g. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. h. Distribution of the Contract Documents. i. Submittal procedures. j. Preparation of Record Documents. k. Work restrictions. i 1. Owner's occupancy requirements. in. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. n. Construction waste management and recycling. i o. Parking availability. p. Office, work, and storage areas. q. Equipment deliveries and priorities. r. First aid. S. Security. t. Progress cleaning. U. Working hours. 3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. C. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. 09070 (3/18/11) PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. 1. Weather limitations. in. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. S. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. U. Installation procedures. V. Coordination with other work. W. Required performance results. X. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals as required by the General Conditions. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 09070 (3/18/11) PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIG14AM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 3100 09070 (3/18/11) PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 01 3200 -CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Field condition reports. 7. Special reports. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 2. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs. 3. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. 09070 (3/18/11) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200- 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. D. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. E. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element. F. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement. G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant. B. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: I . Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies. 1. Approval of cost -loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost -loaded activities. D. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit two opaque copies, large enough to show entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD -R, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label. F. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit three copies of each of the following computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, 09070 (3/18/11) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. 1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. G. Daily Construction Reports: Submit 1 copy at weekly intervals (i.e. 1 copy of the set of 1 report for each day of work). Daily construction reports for the week. H. Material Location Reports: Submit 1 copy at weekly intervals. Field Condition Reports: Submit 1 copy at time of discovery of differing conditions. J. Special Reports: Submit 1 copy at time of unusual event 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar -chart schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 09070 (3/18/11) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling." B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Final Completion. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following: I. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 working days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. 4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. D. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. C. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. C. Purchases. d. Mockups. 09070 (3/18/11) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION O1 3200-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. 1. Startup and placement into final use and operation. E. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. F. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time -impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. G. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar -Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar -chart -type construction schedule within seven days of date established for commencement of the Work. ! B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity -on -node) format. B. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for commencement of the Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a computerized, time -scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for commencement of the Work. a. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 09070 (3/18/11) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200-5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time. Include list of nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule. D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. C. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and commissioning. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer -drawn, time -scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start -total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 09070 (3/18/11) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. 2.5 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: I. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial Completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. C. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 09070 (3/18/11) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200-7 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with report of meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity. B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need -to -know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. END OF SECTION 013200 09070 (3/18/11) CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200-8 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 01 3233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 00:01 A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Construction Photographs: Forward photographs via e-mail once a week to Architect. 1. Format: jpeg. 2. Digital Images: Submit a complete set of digital image electronic files as a Project Record Document on CD-ROM. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. — PART 2- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out -of -focus areas will not be accepted. B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image -editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image. 09070 (3/18/11) PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 3233 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images on CD-ROM in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those submitted to Architect. C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take, digital photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. k 2. Take photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 3. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements. j D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take color, digital photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. E. Architect -Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, Architect will instruct photographer about number and frequency of color, digital photographs and general directions on vantage points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to show the status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. END OF SECTION 013233 09070 (3/18/11) PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings. 2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 3. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction photographs. 4. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements. 5. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 6. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device -independent and display resolution -independent fixed -layout document format. D. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. 09070 (3/18/11) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals, with the following exceptions: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will be available by request for Mechanical, Electrical, and fire sprinkler sub -contractors' use. Architect will deliver the drawings electronically within 3 days. After electronic release form has been returned to architect. 2. Submit electronic submittals as PDF electronic files. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. Architect will notify contractor within 5 calendar days if submittal will be withheld because it is received out of sequence. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Urgent Submittals: Where submittal is required by the Contractor to be reviewed within a shorter period of time than specified, contact Architect prior to submittal. Architect will make an effort to accommodate the Contractor. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: 09070 (3/18/11) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. Jr. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.0l.A). i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. I. Other necessary identification. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.0l.A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. 1. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 09070 (3/18/11) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO in. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. S. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. C. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. G. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. H. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. I. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. Transmittal Form: Use Contractor's form. Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 1. Remarks. in. Signature of transmitter. 2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, 09070 (3/18/11) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES O1 3300-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal. J. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Conforms." K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. L. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Conforms" taken by Architect. 1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions: 1. Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings are requested for Mechanical and Electrical consultants' use. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Submit electronic submittals as PDF electronic files or post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect's FTP site specifically established for Project. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. 09070 (3/18/11) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO C. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturers catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory -installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with specified referenced standards. I. Testing by recognized testing agency. M. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. Number of Copies: Submit PDF electronic file. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. C. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing -in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field -installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. 1. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. in. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. 2. Submit PDF electronic file. 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing. 09070 (3/18/11) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. C. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. 3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality - control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project Record Sample. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. 09070 (3/18/11) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-7 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action. G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 5. Submit sworn statement that lists names of each subcontractor with actual amount of each contract. 2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 09070 (3/18/11) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-8 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. M. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 09070 (3/18/11) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-9 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNNERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. P. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q, Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." R. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. S. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. T. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory -authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: Name, address, and telephone number of factory -authorized service representative making report. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. 09070 (3118111) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300- 10 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO U. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. V. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation." W. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): General Contractor shall submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect. I . Architect will not review MSDS. 2. General Contractor shall receive MSDS sheets form Sub -Contractors. 2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated -Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a unifonn, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 09070 (3118111) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300- 11 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXSUR.G IDAHO 3.2 ARCHITECT'S 1 ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. "Conforms": Submittal appears to conform to the intent of the construction requirements; or with minor changes as noted (notes) will meet the intent of the construction documents. The submittal may be used for work on the project as noted. 2. "Notes": The submittal includes information that must be added to the submittal for it to conform to the intent of the construction documents. 3. "Revise and Resubmit Selected Items": The submittal must be revised in accordance with comments noted and resubmitted for review. The submittal may not be used for work on the project. 4. "Does Not Conform": The submittal may not be used for work on the project. C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION O1 3300 09070 (3118111) SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300- 12 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality -assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality - assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 2. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality -Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality -Control Services; Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and 09070 (3/18/11) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product perfonnance and compliance with industry standards. F. Source Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality -Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub -subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name. J. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximurn, as 09070 (3/18/11) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGLIAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality -control service. C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: I . Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. 09070 (3118111) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2, NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Factory -Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 09070 (3118/11) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO C. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site -assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perforin same tasks for Project. C. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality -assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re -review of each mockup, 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Sections in Divisions 02 through 49. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality -control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perfonn. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order. 09070 (3118111) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality -control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Provide a minimum of 5 working days notice to appropriate Owner consultants before starting work requiring observation or testing, and a minimum of 3 working days notice thereafter for each testing and observation for the continuation of the work items, and a reasonable date and timed fixed for such observation and testing. a. If Work is covered up prior to any required testing or observation, uncovered for review at the Contractor's expense. 4. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality -control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 09070 (3118111) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality -control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to pen -nit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality -assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality - control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in perfonnance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during non -nal working hours. 09070 (3118111) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000-7 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO C. Promptly file all reports with the city of Rexburg, Idaho. 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General; On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that.are as invisible as possible. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality -control services. END OF SECTION 014000 09070 (3118111) QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000- 8 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports. 3. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. 4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections. 1.3 USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations. E. Heating and Cooling: Owner will pay service use charges for heating and cooling used by all entities for construction operations. 09070 (3118111) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000- 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURO IDAHO 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITION S A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2 -inch, 0.148 -inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2 -318 -inch- OD line posts and 2 -718 -inch- OD comer and pull posts, with 1 -518 -inch- OD top rails. B. Portable Chain -Link Fencing: Minimum 2 -inch, 9 -gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2 -3/8 -inch- OD line posts and 2 -718 -inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1 -518 -inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading. B. Common -Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows: 1. Furniture required for Project -site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases. 2. Drinking water and private toilet. 3. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg F. 09070 (3118111) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 4. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height. C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations. Store combustible materials apart from building, 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid -propane -gas or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thennostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline -burning space heaters, open -flame heaters, or salamander -type heating units is prohibited. 2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 3. If Owner authorizes use of new or existing permanent HVAC system, returned HVAC system to equal or better condition than existed prior to use, as judges solely by the Owner. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed pennanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service. 1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully. Connect temporary sewers to private system indicated as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. 09070 (3/18/11) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY -- IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction. D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. E. Heating and Cooling: Owner will pay costs of heating and cooling. Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. G. Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner. H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common -use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in each field office. 2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. C. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices. 09070 (3118111) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office. J, Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail, in common -use facilities. Provide DSL or T-1 line in primary field office. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: I. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. 2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner. B. Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas in same location as permanent roads and paved areas. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limits indicated, as necessary for construction operations. 1, Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas. 2. Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading, proofrolling, compacting, and testing. C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. I. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire -fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. D. Parking: Use designated areas for construction personnel. E. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties nor endanger pennanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations. F. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted. 1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors, 09070 (3118111) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times. G. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste -collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements. H. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities. 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. 1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary." B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing." C. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. D. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. E. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Extent of Fence: As indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, as required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. 2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys. F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. 09070 (3118111) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO H. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1, Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Operate Project -identification -sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight. D. Temporary Facility {Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." END OF SECTION 01 5000 09070 (3118111) TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000-7 F CENTRAL QUAD BRIGRAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SECTION 01 6000 -PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. IW► NlljOr10141:iL A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract Closeout. 2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis -of -Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service 09070 (3118111) PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000- 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. C. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period. 4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents. B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. I. Substitution Request Form: Submit requests in the form and according to procedures required for change -order proposals. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. 09070 (3118111) PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. C. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. 1. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. C. Basis -of -Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 09070 (3118111) PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIG1 AM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturcr's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project -specific inforination and properly executed. 2. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. B. Product Selection Procedures: 09070 (3/18/11) PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Substitutions may be considered when list of products includes equivalent product approved prior to bidding, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered when list of manufacturers includes an equivalent manufacturer approved prior to bidding, unless otherwise indicated. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered when list of products includes equivalent product approved prior to bidding, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Substitutions may be considered when list of manufacturers includes an equivalent manufacturer approved prior to bidding, unless otherwise indicated. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system. Basis -of -Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 09070 (311$!11) PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product. 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. a. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Comply with requirements for substitutions as indicated in applicable paragraphs of the "Instructions to Bidders" in the bidding documents. B. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect. C. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. 2. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the contract time through no fault of the Contractor. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 3. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 4. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. 5. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 6. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 7. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 10. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 11. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. 09070 (3118111) PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO D. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the contractor. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied in Shop Drawings or on product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. F. The following are not considered substitutions: I . Substitutions requested during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award of contract are referred to as "requests for approval as Equals". 2. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. 4. Compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. 2.3 COMPARABLE OR EQUIVALENT PRODUCTS A. 'Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product: I. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as perforinance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 6000 09070 (3118111) PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000-7 � 4 .. ; �,r 1 � t CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNNERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SECTION 01 7300 - EXECUTION PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner -installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following:. 1. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 4. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner -accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. 09070 (3/18111) EXECUTION 01 7300- 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water -service piping; and underground electrical services. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Acceptance of Conditions Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. C. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing -in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to 09070 (3118111) EXECUTION 01 7300-2 CENTRAL (QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: In compliance with General Conditions, before proceeding to lay out the Work to extent indicated, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the Owner's property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Owner promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 09070 {3/18/11} EXECUTION 01 7300-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents, 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated, B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 09070 (3/18/11) EXECUTION 017300-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 2. Allow for thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint -use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom -clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished. Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. 09070 (3118111) EXECUTION 01 7300-5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation, Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory -authorized service representative is required to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. 09070 (3118111) EXECUTION 01 7300-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01 7300 09070 (3/1$111) EXECUTION 01 7300-7 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 01 7329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building. 2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to In -Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. S. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. 09070 (3118111) CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perfonn as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. E. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In -Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 09070 (3/18/11) CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. I, Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Utility Services and Meehan ical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition, B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. ] . In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size 09070 (3/18/11) CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. I. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing. materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3.4 Where existing concrete pavers are removed or damaged and cannot be replaced, provide new pavers closely matching existing. Use Owner's attic stock if available. A. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION 01 7329 09070 (3/18/11) CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SECTION O1 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES FARTI-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning. B. Submit all guarantees, warranties, as -built drawings, operation maintenance instruction manuals, and Shop Drawings to design professional for the Owner in both print and electronic form. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Completion construction photographs and negatives. 2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following in compliance with requirements listed in General Conditions. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. a. Owner and Architect will conduct pre -substantial completion inspections on Contractor's request upon contractor's compliance with requirements indicated in General Conditions. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 09070 (3118/11) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700- 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13, Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 41 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 09070 (3/18/11) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. C. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data, as required in General Conditions, indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: Operation Data: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. b. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations. Maintenance Data: a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. C. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. C. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. h. Copies of warranties and bonds. B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3 -ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to 09070 (3118/11) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3 -ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8 -1f2 -by -1l -inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic -covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste -removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. 09070 (3118111) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. C. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even -textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed hard -surfaced finishes to a dirt -free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Remove labels that are not permanent. j. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. k. Wipe surfaces of electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. 1. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. in. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned -out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. n. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. END OF SECTION 01 7700 09070 (3/18111) CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700-5 �� < ;i • rr . �3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNWERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 01 7839 -PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: I. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked -up Record Prints. B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. 1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked -up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. RECORD DRAWINGS B. Record Prints: Maintain one set of black -line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 09070 (3/18/11) PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839-1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked -up Record Prints. a, Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. C. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. C. Locations and depths of underground utilities. d. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. e. Revisions to electrical circuitry. f. Actual equipment locations. g. Duct size and routing. h. Locations of concealed internal utilities. i. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. j. Changes made following Architect's written orders. k. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. 1. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. M. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red -colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable. 2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable. 09070 (3/18/11) PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual perfonnance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents (referred to as "as-builts" in General Conditions) for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project. C. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01 7839 09070 (3118111) PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839-3 '�- �c CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SECTION 02 4119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises. 2. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below -grade improvements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 09070 (3/18/11) SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. S. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property , for environmental protection , for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: I. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of adjacent buildings. C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. D. Predemolition Photographs: Submit before Work begins. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy buildings immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. 09070 (3/18/11) SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSFASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings or preconstruction photographs and templates. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation," 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 09070 (3/18/11) SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY -- IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 01 1000 "Summary." B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire -suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. C. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris -removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." 09070 (3/18/11) SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." . C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire -suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. 5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin -infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 8. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. B. Removed and Salvaged Items: Clean salvaged items. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 09070 (3/18/11) SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power -driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 314 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power -driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. C. Concrete Slabs -on -Grade: Saw -cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA -approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A, Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 09070 (3/18/11) SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 3.8 'SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. Existing Construction to Be Removed: As indicated on Drawings. B. Existing Items to Be Removed and Salvaged: Includes, but is not limited to, existing site benches and light fixtures. C. Existing Items to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Includes, but is not limited to, to following: 1. Some light fixtures. 2. Existing ail piece. 3. Hydrants and other items as indicated. END OF SECTION 02 4119 09070 (3/18/11) SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119-7 .r, -1:; CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 03 3000 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following: I. Footings. 2. Foundation walls. 3. Slabs -on -grade. B. Related Sections include the following: Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for drainage fill under slabs -on -grade. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast -furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.. B. Architectural Concrete: Formed concrete that is exposed to view on surfaces of completed structure or building and that requires special concrete materials, formwork, placement, or finishes to obtain specified high quality architectural appearance. All exposed concrete shall be high quality architectural concrete. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar 09070 (3118111) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000- 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement. D. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork. 1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and installing and removing reshoring. 2. High Quality Architectural. Concrete Formwork Shop Drawings: Show formwork construction including form -facing joints, construction and contraction joints, form joint - sealant details, form tie locations and patterns, inserts and embedments, cutouts, cleanout panels, and other items that visually affect cast -in-place architectural concrete. E. Welding certificates. F. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. G. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements: Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity. H. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form -release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Bonding agents. 7. Adhesives. 8. Semirigid joint filler. 9. Joint -filler strips. 10. Repair materials. 11. Steel producer's certificates of mill analysis including physical and chemical analysis of reinforcing steel. I. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with specified tolerances. J. Field quality -control test and inspection reports. K. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI -certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI -certified 09070 (3118111) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO Concrete Flatwork Technician. Installer is to have completed concrete Work with a minimum of 10 year record of successful in-service performance and similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Submit copy of Flatwork personnel certifications and years experience for each with current firm and other firms, B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready -mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities." C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer. D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents: 1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," Sections I through 5 and Sections 1 through 5 and Section 7, "Lightweight Concrete." 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice." E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. F. Mockups: Cast concrete slab -on -grade and forrned-surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build panel approximately 200 sq. ft. for slab -on -grade and 100 sq. ft. for formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. For any exposed concrete walls, configure the Class A tolerance wall to include one 90• degree outside chamfered corner, one cold construction joint, one form joint, and other features as may be applicable. 2. Approved panels may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 3. Demolish mockup and remove from site when directed by Architect. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination. At least 20 days prior to submitting design mixtures, conduct a meeting to review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Review requirements for submittals, status of coordinating work, and availability of materials. Establish preliminary work progress schedule and procedures for materials inspection, testing, and certifications. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast -in-place concrete to attend, including the following: 09070 (3/18/11) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. C. Agency responsible for concrete design mixes. d. Agency responsible for field quality control. e. Ready -mix concrete manufacturer. f. Concrete subcontractor. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot -weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint -filler strips, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage. Avoid damaging coatings on steel reinforcement. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of masonry anchors with masonry system installers. B. Obtain written approval from the appropriate waterproofing and thru-wall flashing manufacturers prior to installation of form coatings, fonn release agents, sealers, curing agents, surface coatings, concrete treatments, and other products applied to concrete surfaces indicated to receive waterproofing or thru-wall flashings. This includes manufacturers of floor waterproofing treatments above occupied space. 1.8 GUARANTEE A. Special Guarantee: On form approved by Architect, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to promptly repair or replace all components of concrete that fails in materials or workmanship, including material and labor, within specified guarantee period. 1. Failures include pitting, spalling, cracking, honeycombing, surface color and texture irregularities, air bubbles, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Failure includes installation that does provide indicated slope to drain. Immediately repair or replace concrete and place in satisfactory condition in every particular, any guaranteed work upon written notice from the Project Manager or Architect and make good all damage to the buildings and grounds caused by said work, without cost to the Owner. 2. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Guarantee for New Replacement Work: Provide similar, new 2 -year guarantee from date of completion of replacement work. 09070 (3/18/11) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIG14AM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2.2 FORM -FACING MATERIALS A. Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: Provide form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Forms for Smooth -Formed Finished Concrete: For concrete designated to receive direct finishes such as carpet, tile, EIFS skim coats, etc., provide a. Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as one of the following: 1) High-density overlay undamaged plywood, Class 1 or better; mill -release agent treated and edge sealed, 3f4 -inch thick. 2) B -B (Concrete Fon-n), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. 2. Forms for Smooth -Formed Architectural Finished Exposed Concrete: Form -facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. a. Exterior -grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as one of the following: 1) Medium -density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill -release agent treated and edge sealed. 2) B -B (Concrete Fonm), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. B. Rough -Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit, C. Pan -Type Forms: Glass -fiber -reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation. D. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads. E. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 314 by 314 inch, minimum. 09070 (3118111) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO F. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal. G. Form -Release Agent: Commercially formulated form -release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. Formulate form -release agent with rust inhibitor for steel fonn-facing materials. H. Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, removable or snap -off metal or glass -fiber -reinforced plastic form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal 1. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties with integral water -barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. 2.3 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE A. High Quality Architectural Concrete: Quality of all exposed -to -view concrete and all concrete surfaces to receive waterproofing is of primary importance. Quality of all exposed -to -view concrete is to be consistent in appearance and is to have no less than the following characteristics: 1. Proper and consistent alignment of form panels and form ties. 2. Absence of staining from form leakage. 3. Absence of honeycomb or excessive segregation due to improper vibration or form leakage. 4. Correct placement of rustication or other detail treatment as shown on drawings. 5. Truly square and plumb corners unless clearly directed otherwise. 6. Absence of markings from formwork (i.e. use MDF or plastic forms.) 7. Surfaces to receive waterproofing or thru-wall flashings are free of coatings, form release agents, sealers, curing agents, treatments, and similar materials, unless written prior approval of the products used is obtained from the specified waterproofing or thru-wall flashing manufacturer. 2.4 STEEL. REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Low -Alloy -Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. C. Epoxy -Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars, or ASTM A 934/A 934M, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12 -inch bar length. D. Plain -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn. 09070 (3118/11) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 2.5 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain -steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. B. Epoxy -Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain -steel bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated. C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M. D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows: 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic -protected steel wire or CRSI CIass 2 stainless-steel bar supports. 2. For epoxy -coated reinforcement, use epoxy -coated or other dielectric -polymer -coated wire bar supports. 2.6 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: a. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1, gray. B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: 314 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. 3. For exposed surfaces, and surfaces receiving EIFS skim coats, do not use fine or coarse aggregates which may cause stains on concrete surfaces or that contain substances that cause spalling. 4. Do not use aggregates containing soluble salts or other substances such as iron sulphides, pyrite, marcasite, or ochre which can cause stains on concrete surfaces. C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 314 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. 2.7 ADMIXTURES A. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 09070 (3/18111) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-7 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. I . Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Water -Reducing Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E. 3. Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High -Range, Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High -Range, Water -Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type It. C. Set -Accelerating Corrosion -Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C. Products: a. Boral Material Technologies, Inc.; Boral BCN. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucon CIA. C. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; DCI. d. Master Builders, Inc.; Rheocrete CNI. e. Sika Corporation; Sika CNI. 2.$ FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Steel/Synthetic Fiber: Steel fiber and 100 percent virgin homopolymer polypropylene graded multifilament fiber containing no reprocessed olefin materials engineered and manufactured in an ISO 9002 certified facility for use as concrete reinforcement at a minimum addition rate of one degradable bag per cubic yard. UL Classified. Complying with National Building Codes, ASTM C-1116 Type III 4.1.3 and ASTM A820, steel component not less than 1/4 inch long. Basis of Design Product: Design of steel/synthetic fiber secondary reinforcing system at slabs is based on Novomesh e3 reinforcing as provided by SI Concrete Systems. Upon compliance with requirements provide specified product or equal product from list below with same strength and reinforcing characteristics as approved by Owner and structural engineer of record. a. Steel/Synthetic Fiber: b. Cormix Construction Chemicals. C. Durafiber Corp.; Durafiber. d. Euclid Chemical Company (The). e. FORTA Corporation; Forta. f. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. g. Metalcrete Industries. h. SI Concrete Systems. 09070 (3/18/11) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-8 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 2.9 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Products: a. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Aquafilm. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar. C. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E -Con. d. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Confilm. e. Metalcrcte Industries; Waterhold. B. Moisture -Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap -polyethylene sheet. C. Water: Potable. D. Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class A, moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq. meter when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal. 1. Products: a. Anti -Hydro International, Inc.; A -H 3 Way Sealer. b. Burke by ldoco; Spartan -Cote. C. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Conspec fl. d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucocure. e. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R. f. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; Masterkure. g. W.R. Meadows, Inc.; CS -309. h. Metalcrete Industries; Seal N Kure. i. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Kure -N -Seal 2.10 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt -saturated cellulosic fiber. Construct isolation joints in slabs -on -grade at points of contact between slabs -on -grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations as indicated B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. C. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot -dip galvanized steel sheet, not less than 0.0336 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris. 09070 (3/18/11) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-9 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Repair Underlayment: Cement -based, polymer -modified, self -leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well -graded, washed gravel, 118 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M. 2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. I. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures. 2. Do not use the same testing agency for field quality control testing. B. Limit water-soluble, chloride -ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water -reducing, high -range water -reducing, or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water -reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50. 4. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F. 5. Use high -range water -reducing admixture in pumped concrete, architectural concrete, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with water -cement ratios below 0.50. 6. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within the following limits: a. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals, or hydraulic pressure: 6.0 percent for 3/4 -inch maximum aggregate. b. Other concrete not exposed to freezing, thawing, or hydraulic pressure, or to receive a surface hardener: 2 to 3 percent air. 09070 (3/18/11) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000- 10 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGI AM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when warranted by characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances. Submit laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results to Architect and obtain Architect's acceptance before using in Work. 1. Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens as specified in ACI 301 and in accordance with ASTM C 192 and conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C 39. 2. Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in ACI 301. 3. If suitable data from field experience or laboratory trial batches cannot be obtained, concrete proportions may be established by use of the water -cement ratio limits table and the limiting restrictions of ACI 301. 4. Strength data for establishing standard deviation will be considered suitable if the concrete production facility has certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in one group or the statistical average for 2 groups totaling 30 or more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions. 5. Standard Deviation: If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if no suitable records are available, select proportions to produce an average strength of at least 1200 psi greater than the required compressive strength of concrete. 6. After sufficient experience and test data become available from the job, using ACI 214 methods of evaluation, the standard deviation may be reduced when the probable frequency of tests more than 500 psi below required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100, and that the probable frequency of an average of 3 consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not exceed 1 in 100. 2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS A. General: Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Architect. B. Footings: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: I . Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches or 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high -range water -reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture. 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. C. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches or 8 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches before adding high -range water -reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture. 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 09070 (3/18/11) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000- 11 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO D. Slabs -on -Grade: Proportion normal -weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4500 psi at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 611 lb/cu. yd.. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, maximum. 4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent. 6. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 3 lb/cu. yd. 2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.15 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2. Include at least the following information on each batch ticket: a. Name of ready -mix batch plant. b. Serial number of ticket. C. Date and number of truck. d. Name of Contractor. e. Specific designation of job (name and location). f. Volume of concrete (number of cubic yards). g. Time batch was dispensed to truck. h. Reading of revolution counter at first addition of water. i. Signature or initials of ready -mix representative. j. Type and brand of cement. k. Amount of cement (can be indicated by weight or quantity). 1. Total water content by producer (can be indicated by weight or quantity). M. Water added by receiver of concrete and his initials (can be indicated by weight or quantity). n. Admixtures and amount of same. o. Maximum size of aggregate. p. Weights of fine and coarse aggregates. q. Indication that all ingredients are as previously certified or approved. 09070 (3/18/11) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000- 12 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ensure that all silt, loose rock, and deleterious material has been removed from the building area prior to concrete pouring. Evaluate site prior to bidding to determine if any additional topsoil removal may be required. Do not use this material as fill. 1. Bear all footings on approved sound bedrock or approved lean inix concrete. 3.3 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads. Use camber in the formwork as required for anticipated deflections. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. I. Provide surveys in addition to those required for general lines and levels to check the lines and levels of completed formwork for exposed work before concrete is placed. D. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: I. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth -formed finished surfaces and high quality architectural surfaces including surfaces exposed to view and surfaces to receive waterproofing, carpeting, or vinyl tiling. Comply with ACT 303.1 limits on form -facing panel deflection. 2. Class B, 114 inch for rough -formed finished surfaces. E. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. F. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. 1. Install keyways, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust -stained steel form -facing material. 3. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust -preventative material. 09070 (3/18/11) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000- 13 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO G. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in fonns at inconspicuous locations. I. At construction joints, overlap forms over hardened concrete at least 6 inches. J. Chamfer exterior comers and edges of permanently exposed concrete. K. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. L. Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete. M. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. N. Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, fonn-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. Form coatings: Coat forms prior to placement of reinforcing steel. Do not allow excess form coating material to accumulate in farms or come into contact with surfaces which will be bonded to fresh concrete. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions. O. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forns, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike -off templates or compacting -type screeds. 3.4 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast -in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through -wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated. Place all sleeves, inserts, anchors and embedded items required for adjoining work, or for its support, prior to concreting. 09070 (3/18/11) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 14 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 3.5 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete, if concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by fonn- removal operations and curing and protection operations are maintained. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved 100 percent of its 28 -day design compressive strength or for 28 days, which ever is longer. a. Determining numbers of cylinders, testing dates, and costs associated with field - cured cylinders. 2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores. Do not remove form -facing material less than 4 days after placement, B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form -facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form -release agent. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. 3.6 SHORES AND RESHORES A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring. 1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete. B. Where concrete construction extends to more than one floor level, extend shoring or reshoring over both stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement. C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection. D. Keep reshores in place a minimum of 28 days after placing upper tier, or longer, if required, until concrete has attained its required 28 -day strength and heavy loads due to construction operations have been removed. 3.7 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement. 09070 (3/18111) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000- 15 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1. Do not tack weld reinforcing bars. 2. Do not bend reinforcing steel after embedding in hardened concrete, unless authorized by Owner. 3. In the case of fabricating errors, do not rebend or straighten reinforcing steel. 4. Locate reinforcing splices at points of minimum stress. 5. Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be permitted in the work: a. Bar lengths, depths, and bends exceeding specified fabrication limits. b. Bends or kinks not indicated on drawings or final shop drawings. C. Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other cause. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Secure reinforcement bars with wire ties at all points of intersection unless the spacing is less than 12 inches in each direction, in which case tie alternate points of intersection Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Epoxy -Coated Reinforcement: Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/133963M. Use epoxy -coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy -coated steel reinforcement 3.8 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam -girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 09070 (3118111) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 16 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO C. Contraction Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one- fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 1/8 -inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. 3. If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints not exceeding 15 feet in either direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third bays). Show on shop drawings for architect's approval. 4. Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." D. Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Grade: After removing formwork, install joint -filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. I. Extend joint -filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Terminate full -width joint -filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated. 3. Install joint -filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. If concrete of a concrete delivery truck is rejected for any reason, do not allow truck on-site for a minimum of 12 hours after moment of rejection. B. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. C. Preparation of Subgrade for Slabs on Grade: Keep subgrade moist but do not allow standing water, mud or soft spots. If temperature where concrete is to be placed is below 50• F, enclose and hcat to maintain temperature above 50• F long enough to remove frost from subgrade. D. Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified. E. Do not allow time between charging of materials in the mixing drum and placement on site to exceed 90 minutes (60 minutes for air -entrained concrete), less for higher temperatures. 09070 (3/18/11) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000- 17 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO F. Use conveying equipment that conforms to ASTM C 94. G. Handle concrete from mixer to place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable. H. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 and the following. Account for all water added to the concrete mix. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high -range water -reducing admixtures to mixture. 2. Do not add any water to ready -mix concrete drum unless the following conditions are satisfied: a. Water is added only while the concrete is mixing in the drum. b. Mixing truck is equipped with a revolution counter and a working water meter. C. Delivery ticket provides all information required in this Section so that the total amount of water added to the mix can be determined. d. Provide slurry test and compression tests for all concrete after water is added at site. I. Bear footings 6 inches into sound bedrock. Refer to Division 2 Section "Subdrainage" for appropriate definition of bedrock for this Project. Dowel continuous and spot footings, columns and piers into bedrock using Super Por -Rock with reinforcing as directed by Structural Engineer. 1. Lean -Mix Concrete Fill: Bear footings on bedrock as defined above or on lean -mix concrete fill, which bears b inches into bedrock. Lean -mix concrete may be placed across the clean base of the footing excavations for a Icveling course. J. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. 1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth no deeper than 24 inches and to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. 2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. Internal vibrators shall have a minimum frequency of 8000 vibrations per minute and sufficient amplitude to consolidate the concrete effectively. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate. 4. If a section cannot be placed continuously, locate construction joints as approved a maximum of 30 foot on center. 5. Do not allow concrete to free fall over 4 feet. b. Deposit concrete as near as possible to its final position to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. 7. Clean and dampen hardened concrete surfaces to receive fresh concrete. 09070 (3118111) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000- 18 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO K. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. Slope surfaces uniformly, 118 -inch per foot minimum, to drains where required. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbics to form a uniform and open -textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. L. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials, or on frozen concrete surfaces. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. M. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: I. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough -Formed Finish: As -cast concrete texture imparted by form -facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed 1l4 -inch in height on formed -surface irregularities. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. B. Smooth-Fonned Finish: As -east concrete texture imparted by form -facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed -surface irregularities. 09070 (3118111) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000- 19 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete such as waterproofing, painting, or another similar system. C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with ACI302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power -driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces to be covered with fluid -applied waterproofing. 2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked surface: a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 20; and of levelness, F C. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.12 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection and ACI 301 for hot - weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period. 09070 (3/18/11) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-20 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, and other surfaces. E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods: Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water -fog spray. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 -inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends Iapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. a. Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings. b. Moisture cure or use moisture -retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments. C. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture -retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project. 3. Begin curing operations immediately after placement. Protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, mechanical injury or vandalism. F. Stain Prevention: Use special care to prevent petroleum and other stains from forming on concrete surfaces. Comply with at least the following: 1. Diaper all hydraulic powered equipment to avoid staining of concrete. 2. Do not allow vehicles to park on the interior slabs if avoidable. If vehicles are necessary to complete scope of work, place drop cloths below vehicles at all times. 3. Do not use pipe cutting machines on interior floor slabs. 4. Avoid rust staining. Do not allow steel to be placed on interior slab. 3.13 JOINT FILLING A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six months unless otherwise approved by Architect to meet schedule requirements. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry. 09070 (3118111) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-21 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw -cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening. 3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval. B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only. enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes and fill with dry -pack mortar or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 114 inch in any dimension , and holes left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form - tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. No featheredge will be permitted. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as slabs, for finish smoothness and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding, Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a proprietary repair underlayment when acceptable to Architect. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single 09070 (3118111) CAST -]N -PLACE CONCRETE 033000-22 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 314 -inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. G. Where parging may be required, alignment, color and texture must match adjacent concrete and be approved by the Architect. H. Architectural Concrete: Use special care repairing concrete exposed to view. Comply with the following: 1. Protect corners, edges, and surfaces of architectural concrete from damage; use guards and barricades. 2. Protect architectural concrete from staining, laitance, and contamination during remainder of construction period. 3. Clean architectural concrete surfaces after finish treatment to remove stains, markings, dust, and debris. 4. Wash and rinse architectural concrete surfaces according to concrete finish applicator's written recommendations. Protect other Work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations. 5. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of cast -in- place architectural concrete finishes. 3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: I . Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 09070 (3118111) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-23 CENTRAL QUAD BRIG1 AM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding I cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive -strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal -weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory -cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field -cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive -strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory - cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive -strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 09070 (3/18/11) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-24 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY --- IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28 -day tests. 11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammcr, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply with the Contract Documents. D. Measure slab flatness and Ievelness according to ASTM E 1155 within 24 hours of finishing. END OF SECTION 03 3000 09070 (3/18/11) CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000-25 'r ct `�fi s. CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 05 1200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: I. Structural steel, unprimed. 2. Base plates. 3. Grout, B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural -steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural -steel fabricator to withstand ASD -service loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design," Volume 2, Part 9 or AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design," Part 4. B. Construction: Type 2, simple framing. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components. 09070 (3/18/11) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200- 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip -critical high-strength bolted connections. C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator, and testing agency. E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements: I . Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Direct -tension indicators. 4. Tension -control, high-strength bolt -nut -washer assemblies. 5. Shear stud connectors. 6. Nonshrink grout. F. Source quality -control test reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who has a 10 year minimum record of successful in-service performance in projects equal in size and scope. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a qualified firm experienced in fabricating structural steel similar to that indicated for this Project and with a minimum of 10 year record of successful in- service performance in projects of equal size, as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code --Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement No. 2." 3. AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." 4. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." 5. AISC's "Specification for Allowable Stress Design of Single -Angle Members." 6. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 09070 (3118111) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1, Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. C. Medium -Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 65-35, carbon steel. D. High -Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 148/A 148M,Grade 80-50, carbon or alloy steel. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. General: Use only stainless steel bolts at wood trellis. B. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. 2. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 compressible -washer type. a. Finish: Plain. 09070 (3/18/11) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO C. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts or tension -control, bolt -nut -washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon -steel washers, plain. Direct -Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490, compressible -washer type, plain. D. Tension -Control, High -Strength Bolt -Nut -Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy hex or round head steel structural bolts with splined ends; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. E. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed -stud type, cold -finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B. F. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 307, Grade A. 1. Configuration: Straight or Hooked. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain. G. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or ASTM A 307, Grade A, straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain. H. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 307, Grade A. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain. I. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A 108, Grade 1035, cold -finished carbon steel. J. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold -finished carbon steel. K. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold -finished carbon steel. 2.3 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30 -minute working time. 09070 (3/18/11) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2.4 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design or Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings." 1. Camber structural -steel members where indicated. 2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 61 A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete structural -steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop - priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC- SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. G. Steel Wall -Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall - opening framing to be attached to structural steel. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. H. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by burning. 2. Base -Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.5 BEARING PLATES A. Provide bearing plates for steel items bearing on concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates after fabrication. 09070 (3/18/11) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200- 5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. Joint Type: Slip critical, with threads excluded from shear planes. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 2. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show - through on exposed steel surfaces. a. Grind butt welds flush. b. Grind or fill exposed fillet welds to smooth profile. Dress exposed welds. 2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Testing agency will conduct and interpret tests and state in each report whether test specimens comply with or deviate from requirements. 2. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural -steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. D. Bolted Connections: Shop -bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." E. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop -welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. 09070 (3118111) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO F. In addition to visual inspection, shop -welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: I. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less -than- continuous 360 -degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast -in- place concrete has attained its design compressive strength. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design or Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug -tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 09070 (3118111) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-7 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage -resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel and architecturally exposed structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Do not splice members. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. Joint Type: Slip critical, with threads excluded from shear planes. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS DLI for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. I. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings --Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design or Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for mill material. 09070 (3/18/11) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-8 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 4. Verify that weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment used for architecturally exposed structural steel will limit distortions to allowable tolerances. Prevent weld show - through on exposed steel surfaces. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Shop -bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. I . In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. C. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field -welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less -than- continuous 360 -degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Conduct tests on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. E. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 05 1200 09070 (3/18/11) STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 1200-9 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SECTION 05 5213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: Steel pipe and tube railings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Handrails: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied horizontally and concurrently with 100 lbf/ ft. applied vertically downward. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. C. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. C. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for then -nal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 09070 (3/18/11) PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 - 1 CENTRAL. QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings. 2. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required. L Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters. 2. Fittings and brackets. D. Welding certificates. E. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. F. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/Dl.]M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field. Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating railings without field 09070 (3/1811.1) PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.7 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural perfonnance requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Steel Pipe and Tube Railings: a. Pisor Industries, Inc. b. Wagner, R & B, Inc., a division of the Wagner Companies. C. Equivalent local company complying with requirements and approved by Architect prior to bid. 2.2 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 STEEL AND IRON A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513. B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 09070 (3/18/11) PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO Provide galvanized finish. C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 361A 36M. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide the following: Galvanized -Steel Components: Plated -steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating. B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads. C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching them to other work, unless otherwise indicated. D. Anchors: Provide cast -in-place or torque -controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI##25. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zine -dust -content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory -packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly 09070 (3118111) PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1132 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections, unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. 1. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. Fonn changes in direction as follows: As detailed. K. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall -mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work, unless otherwise indicated. At brackets and fittings fastened to gypsum board partitions, provide fillers made from crush -resistant material, or other means to transfer wall loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate. 09070 (3/18/1.1) PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings: 1. Hot -dip galvanize steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A 1231A 123M for hot -dip galvanized railings. 3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot -dip galvanized hardware. 4. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 5. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. B. For galvanized railings, provide hot -dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components. C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner. D. Powder -Coat Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat galvanized metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows; 1. Prepare galvanized metal by thoroughly removing grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter. 2. Treat prepared metal with zinc -phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal surfaces. 3. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured -film thickness not less than 1.5 mils. 4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to farm tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1116 inch in 3 feet. 09070 (3/18/11) PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. D. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction. 3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not farther apart than required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip -joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond joint on either side, fasten internal sleeve securely to 1 side, and locate joint within 6 inches of post. 3.3 ANCHORING POSTS A. Form or core -drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Leave anchorage joint exposed; wipe off surplus anchoring material; and leave 118 -inch buildup, sloped away from post. C. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: For stainless-steel pipe railings, weld flanges to post and bolt to supporting surfaces 3.4 ATTACHING HANDRAILS TO WALLS A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1 -112 -inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. C. Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows: For concrete anchorage, use drilled -in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 09070 (3/18/11) PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 -7 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780, 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 05 5213 09070 (3118111) PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 5213 -8 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 06 1063 - RECLAIMED WOOD LUMBER PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Overhead Trellis structure components, including reclaimed wood beams and crossbeam trellis members. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings for Trellis: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show anchorage, fittings, and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: 1. For lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by ALSC's Board of Review. B. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in Idaho and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those perfonned for installations of bolted trellis systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated on Drawings. Manufacturer's published 09070 (3118111) RECLAIMED WOOD LUMBER 06 1063- 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RECLAIMED LUMBER A. Reclaimed Wood: Basis of Design — Trestlewood II Reclaimed Circular Sawn Douglas Fir obtained from pilings of Lucin Cutoff Railroad Trestle at the Great Salt Lake, as provided by Trestlewood. 1. Provide reclaimed Douglas fir material hand -selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot -holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane. a. Species and Grade: Reclaimed kiln -dried Trestlewood Il, solid boards of dimensions indicated in drawings. b. Colors: As selected by Architect. C. Fasteners: Use stainless steel bolts. Comply with wood supplier's recommendations for separating metal from wood. B. Finish: Provide and apply finish product recommended by Trestlewood supplier. 2.2 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Bolts: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 09070 (3118111) RECLAIMED WOOD LUMBER 06 1063-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO B. proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set beams and crossbeams to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit beams to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. B. Install separator between wood and metal bolt. C. Do not splice members between supports unless otherwise indicated. D. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. E. Securely attach exterior carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. F. Arrange bolts parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. END OF SECTION 06 1063 09070 (3/18/11) RECLAIMED WOOD LUMBER 06 1063 -3 _i 4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 07 1416- COLD FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Latex -rubber waterproofing. 2. Molded -sheet drainage panels. B. Related Section: L Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint -sealant materials and installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions. C. Samples: For the following products: 1. Flashing sheet, 10 by 8 inches. 2. Membrane -reinforcing fabric, 10 by 8 inches. 3. Drainage panel, 4 by 4 inches. D. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. E. Product Test Reports: For waterproofing, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. F. Field quality -control reports. G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 09070 (3118111) COLD FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416-1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of 20 -years experience in the production of cold fluid - applied waterproofing. C. Source Limitations: Obtain primary waterproofing materials and molded -sheet drainage panels from single source from single manufacturer. D. Mockups: Before beginning installation, install waterproofing to 100 sq. ft. of wall to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, thickness, texture, and execution quality. 1. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reapply waterproofing until mockups are approved. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. I. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 09070 (3118111) COLD FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 1416-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIG14AM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during application and curing period. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Material Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which waterproofing manufacturer agree to provide replacement material that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1116 inch in width. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of two years. 1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling drainage panels. C. Special Manufacturer's Watertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which waterproofing manufacturer agrees to make, or cause to be made, repairs necessary to correct leaks resulting from ordinary wear and tear and the effects thereof and improper workmanship by the Installer. Conditions: a. Project shall be pre -approved by manufacturer. b. Project shall be installed by approved Installer. C. Independent inspector shall be engaged by manufacturer. 2. Warranty Period: Fifteen years from date of Substantial Completion. 3. Exclusion: Warranty shall not include removal and replacement of overburden. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LATEX -RUBBER WATERPROOFING A. Two -Component, Unrcinforced, Latex -Rubber Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836 and with manufacturer's written physical requirements. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Grace Construction Products; Procor 75 Spray Grade, horizontal and vertical applications. 09070 (3118111) COLD FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 1416-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with one another and with waterproofing, as demonstrated by waterproofing manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 23 MOLDED -SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded -Sheet Drainage Panel for Vertical Applications: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle -punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to one side with a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded - plastic -sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 16 gpm per ft.. Basis -of -Design Product: Grace Construction Products, Hydroduct 220. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with histaller present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide clean, dust -free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or overspray affecting other construction. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form -release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and other penetrating contaminants or film -forming coatings from concrete. 1. Abrasive blast clean concrete surfaces uniformly to expose top surface of fine aggregate according to ASTM D 4259 with a self-contained, recirculating, blast -cleaning apparatus. Remove material to provide a sound surface free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, or form -release agents. Remove remaining loose material and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258. 09070 (3/18/11) COLD FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 1416-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNNERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO D. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. 3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS A. Prepare vertical surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturers written instructions. B. Prime substrate with manufacturer's recommended concrete sealer, based on expected surface and ambient temperatures, unless otherwise instructed by waterproofing manufacturer C, Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Provide liquid detail membrane cants (fillets) around penetrations and at inside corners of deck -to -wall butt joints when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks, complying with ASTM D 4258, before coating surfaces. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint -sealant installation. 2. Apply bond breaker between sealant and preparation strip.. 3. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation strip extending a minimum of 6 inches along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat. B. Install sheet flashing and bond to wall substrates where indicated or required according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. .Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate according to ASTM C 898. 3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A. Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 898 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply sealer over prepared substrate when required by manufacturer. C. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications; Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray, roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate. 1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases, with a minimum dry film thickness of 90 mils. 09070 (3118111) COLD FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416-5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2. Pre -treat inside corners and penetrations with 314 inch fillet of liquid detail membrane. 3. Pre -treat inside and outside corners, non-moving joints and hairline cracks, drains and penetrations with a 60 mil membrane coating 6inches (150mm) in each direction. 4. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces. 5. Verify wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft.. D. For vertical applications, set protection course in nominally -cured membrane that will act as an adhesive. Use molded -sheet drainage panels as separate protection course. 3.6 MOLDED -SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded -sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. For vertical applications, set drainage panel in nominally -cured membrane that will act as an adhesive. Lap edges and ends of geotextile fabric to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded -sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 3.7 CURING, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07 1416 09070 (3118111) COLD FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING 07 1416-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO a • 81►ZH1070ito] SECTION 26 0501 -COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PARTI-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. General electrical system requirements and procedures. 2. Perform excavating and backfilling work required by work of this Division as described in Contract Documents. 3. Make electrical connections to equipment provided under other Sections. 4. Furnish and install Penetration Firestop Systems at electrical system penetrations as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 07: Quality of Penetration Firestop Systems to be used on Project and submittal requirements, 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Provide following information for each item of equipment: a. Catalog Sheets. b. Assembly details or dimension drawings. C. Installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's name and catalog number, C. Name of local supplier. 2. Furnish such information for following equipment: a. Section 26 2726: Wiring devices. b. Section 26 5100: lighting fixtures. 3. Do not purchase equipment before approval of product data. 4. Submit in three-ring binder with hard cover (six sets) B. Quality Assurance 1 Control: 1. Report of site tests, before Substantial Completion. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. NEC and local ordinances and regulations shall govern unless more stringent requirements are specified.. 2. Material and equipment provided shall meet standards of NEMA or UL, or ULC, CSA, or EEMAC and bear their label whercver standards have been established and label service is available. B. Materials and equipment provided under following Sections shall be by same Manufacturer: 1. Sections 26 5100, Lighting fixtures C. Contractor shall obtain all permits and arrange all inspections required by local codes and ordinances applicable to this Division. 1.4 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide competent instructor for time required to adequately train maintenance personnel in operation and maintenance of electrical equipment and systems. Factory representatives shall assist this instruction as necessary. Schedule instruction period at time of final inspection. 09070 (3/18/11) COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260501 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare and submit (4) four complete copies of the O & M Manuals—manuals to contain information listed below. Place each manual in a tabbed three-ring binder upon completion of the project. I . Operation and Maintenance manual must contain the following items: a. Copies of reviewed shop drawings. b. Letter of 1 -year guarantee of workmanship. C. Copy of voltage and ammeter readings. d. Copy of letter verifying owner's receipt of spare parts. 1.6 GUARANTEE A. The following guarantee is a part of this specification and shall be binding on the part of the Contractor: "The Contractor guarantees that this installation is free from mechanical defects. He agrees to replace or repair, to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative, any part of this installation which may fail or be determined unacceptable within a period of one (1) year after final acceptance. " 1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS A. During the course of construction, the Electrical Contractor shall maintain a set of drawings upon which all deviations from the original layout are recorded. These marked -up prints shall be turned over to the Architect/Engineer at the con- clusion of the work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS: Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. All such work shall be included without additional cost to Owner. B. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of equipment to be installed and coordinate these with site dimensions and with other Sections. 3.2. INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Locations of electrical equipment shown on Drawings are approximate only. Field verify actual locations for proper installation. 2. Coordinate electrical equipment locations and conduit runs with those providing equipment to be served before installation or rough -in, a. Notify Architect of conflicts before beginning work. b. Coordinate locations of power and lighting outlets in mechanical rooms and other areas with mechanical equipment, piping, ductwork, cabinets, etc, so they will be readily accessible and functional. 3. Work related to other trades which is required under this Division, such as cutting and patching, trenching, and backfilling, shall be performed according to standards specified in applicable Sections. B. Install Penetration Firestop System appropriate for penetration at electrical system penetrations through walls, ceilings, and top plates of walls. .09070 (3/18/11) COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260501 -2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: Test systems and demonstrate equipment as working and operating properly. Notify Architect before test. Rectify defects at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 09070 (3118111) COMMON ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 260501 -3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 26 4502 - ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1,1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To 1. Demolition involving electrical system as described in Contract Documents. B. Related Sections 1. Section 26051 — Common Electrical Requirements 2. New and replacement work specified in appropriate specification Section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A, All relocations, reconnections, and removals are not necessarily indicated on Drawings. All such work shall be included without additional cost to Owner, 3.2 PREPARATION A. Disconnect equipment that is to be removed or relocated. Carefully remove, disassemble, or dismantle as required, and store in approved location on site, existing items to be reused in completed work. B. Where affected by demolition or new construction, relocate, extend, or repair raceways, conductors, outlets, and apparatus to allow continued use of electrical system. Use methods and materials as specified for new construction. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. Perform drilling, cutting, block -offs, and demolition work required for removal of necessary portions of electrical system. Do not cutjoists, beams, girders, trusses, or columns without prior written permission from Architect. B. Remove concealed wiring abandoned due to demolition or new construction. Remove circuits, conduits, and conductors that are not to be re -used back to next active fixture, device, or junction box. C. Patch, repair, and finish surfaces affected by electrical demolition work, unless work is specifically called for under other Sections of the specifications. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove obsolete raceways, conductors, apparatus, and lighting fixtures promptly from site and dispose of legally. END OF SECTION 09070 (3/18/11) ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS 26 0502 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO 1:7-:ti:46.1814610211�7:1:Is] SECTION 26 0519 - LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE PART l - 1,1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of conductors used on Project except as excluded below. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Line Voltage: Over 70 Volts. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Line Voltage Conductors: L Copper with AWG sizes as shown: a. Minimum size shall be No. 12 except where specified otherwise. b. Conductor size No. 8 and larger. 2. Insulation: a. Standard Conductor Size No. 10 And Smaller: 600V type THWN or XHHW (75 deg C). b. Standard Conductor Size No, 8 And Larger: 600V Type THW, THWN, or XHHW (75 deg C). C. Higher temperature insulation as required by NEC or local codes.. 3. Colors: a. 208Y / 120 V System: 1) Black: Phase A. 2) Red: Phase B. 3) Blue: Phase C, 4) Green: Ground, 5) White: Neutral. b. 480Y / 277 Volt System: I ) Brown: Phase A. 2) Orange: Phase B. 3) Yellow: Phase C. 4) Gray: Neutral. 5) Green: Ground. C, Conductors size No. 10 and smaller shall be colored full length. Tagging or other methods for coding of conductors size No. 10 and smaller not allowed. d. For feeder conductors larger than No, 10 at pull boxes, gutters, and panels, use painted or taped band or color tag color -coded as specified above. B. Standard Connectors: 1. Conductors No. 8 And Smaller: Steel spring wire connectors. 2. Conductors Larger Than No. 8: Pressure type terminal lugs. 3. Connections Outside Building: Watertight steel spring wire connections with waterproof, non -hardening sealant. C. Terminal blocks for tapping conductors: I . Terminals shall be suitable for use with 75 deg C copper conductors. 2, Acceptable Products: a. 16323 by Cooper Bussmann, St Louis, MO www.bussmann.com 09070 (3/18111) LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 260519-1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY - IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO b. LBA363106 by Square D Co, Palatine, IL www.square:d.com. C. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. See Section 016000. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A, General: 1. Conductors and cables shall be continuous from outlet to outlet. 2. Do not use direct burial cable. B. Line Voltage Conductors (Over 70 Volts): 1. Install conductors in raceway except where specifically indicated otherwise. Run conductors of different voltage systems in separate conduits. 2. Route circuits at own discretion, however, circuiting shall be as shown in Panel Schedules. Group circuit homeruns to panels as shown on Drawings. 3. Neutrals: a. On three-phase, 4 -wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than three circuits. b. On single-phase, 3 -wire systems, do not use common neutral for more than two circuits. C. Run separate neutrals for each circuit where specifically noted on Drawings. d. Where common neutral is run for two or three home run circuits, connect phase conductors to breakers in panel which are attached to separate phase legs so neutral conductors will carry only unbalanced current. Neutral conductors shall be of same size as phase conductors unless specifically noted otherwise. 4. Pulling Conductors: a. Do not pull conductors into conduit until raceway system is complete and cabinets and outlet boxes are free of foreign matter and moisture. b. Do not use heavy mechanical means for pulling conductors. C. Use only listed wire pulling lubricants. END OF SECTION 09070 (3/18111) LINE VOLTAGE CONDUCTORS AND CABLE 260519-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SECTION 26 0526 -GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Furnish and install grounding for electrical installation as described in Contract Documents except as excluded below. B, Related. Sections: 1. Section 26 0501: Common Electrical Requirements. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pre -Installation Conference: Participate in pre -installation conference specified in Section 03 3111. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Size materials as shown on Drawings and in accordance with applicable codes. B. Grounding And Bonding Jumper Conductors: Bare copper or with green insulation. C. Make grounding conductor connections to ground rods and water pipes using approved bolted clamps listed for such use. D. Service Grounding Connections And Cable Splices: 1, Make by compression type connectors designed specifically for this purpose. 2. Acceptable Products: a. Burndy b. Thomas & Betts. C. Equal as approved by Architect before bidding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: Coordinate with Section 03 3111 in installing grounding conductor and placing concrete. Do not allow placement of concrete before Architect's inspection of grounding conductor installation. B. Grounding conductors and bonding jumper conductors shall be continuous from terminal to terminal without splice. Provide grounding for following. I. Electrical service, its equipment and enclosures. 2. Conduits and other conductor enclosures. 3. Neutral or identified conductor of interior wiring system. 4. Main panelboard, power and lighting panelboards, 5. Non -current -carrying metal parts of fixed equipment such as motors, starter and controller cabinets, instrument cases, and lighting Fixtures. C. Pull grounding conductors in non-metallic raceways, in flexible steel conduit exceeding 72 inches in length, and in flexible conduit connecting to mechanical equipment. 09070 (3/18/11) GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNNERSITY - IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO D. Bond conduit grounding bushings to enclosures with minimum #110 AWG conductor. E. Connect equipment grounds to building system ground. I. Use same size equipment grounding conductors as phase conductors up through #10 AWG. 2. Use NEC Table 250-95 for others unless noted otherwise in Drawings. Run separate insulated grounding cable from each equipment cabinet to electrical panel, Do not use intermediate connections or splices. Affix directly to cabinet. G. Provide a separate, insulated equipment green grounding conductor in all feeder and branch circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug, bus, or bushing and to all metallic enclosures. A conduit ground is not acceptable. Install grounding bushings on both ends of all feeder conduit and bond to ground system. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspections: Notify Architect for inspection two days minimum before placing concrete over grounding conductor. END OF SECTION 09070 (3/18/11) GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY - IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SECTION 26 0533 -RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Includes But Not Limited To: 1. Quality of material and installation procedures for raceway, boxes, and fittings used on Project but furnished under other Divisions. 2. Furnish and install raceway, conduit, and boxes used on Project not specified to be installed under other Divisions. B. Related Sections 1. Section 26 0501: General Electrical Requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Raceway And Conduit: 1. Sizes: a. 3/4 inch for exterior underground use, b. 1/2 inch minimum elsewhere, unless indicated otherwise. 2, Types: Usage of each type is restricted as specified below by product. a. Galvanized rigid steel or galvanized intermediate metal conduit (IMC) is allowed for use in all areas. Where in contact with earth or concrete, wrap buried galvanized rigid steel and galvanized IMC conduit and fittings completely with vinyl tape. b. Galvanized Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1) Allowed for use only in indoor dry locations where it is: a) Not subject to damage. b) Not in contact with earth. c) Not in concrete. 2) Flexible steel conduit or metal -clad cable required for final connections to indoor mechanical equipment. c. Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit: 1) Allowed for use only underground or below concrete with galvanized rigid steel or IMC elbows and risers. d. Listed, Liquid -Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: I ) Use in outdoor final connections to mechanical equipment, length not to exceed 36 inches. C. Pre -wired 3/8 Inch Flexible Fixture Whips: Allowed only for connection to recessed lighting fixtures, lengths not to exceed 72 inches. 3. Prohibited Raceway Materials: a. Aluminum conduit. b. Armored cable type AC (BX) cable. B. Raceway And Conduit Fittings: 1. Rigid Steel Conduit And IMC: Threaded and designed for conduit use. 2. EMT: a. Compression type. b. Steel set screw housing type. 3. PVC Conduit: a. PVC type. Use PVC adapters at all boxes. b. PVC components, (conduit, fittings, cement) shall be from same Manufacturer. 4. Flexible Steel Conduit: Screw-in type. 5. Liquid -tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Sealtite type. 6. Expansion fittings shall he equal to OZ Type AX sized to raceway and including bonding jumper. 7. Prohibited Fitting Materials: a. Crimp -on, tap -on, indenter type fittings. 09070 (3/18111) RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO b. Cast set -screw fittings for EMT. C. Spray (aerosol) PVC cement. C. Outlet Boxes: 1. Galvanized steel of proper size and shape are acceptable for all systems. Where metal boxes are used, provide following: a. Provide metal supports and other accessories for installation of each box. b. Equip ceiling and bracket fixture boxes with fixture studs where required. C. Equip outlets in plastered, paneled, and furred finishes with plaster rings and extensions to bring box flush with finish surface. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Contact Information: 1. Cooper B -Line, Highland, IL www.bline.com. 2. Hubbell Incorporated, Milford, CT wwxv.hubbell-w•iring.com. 3. Square D, Palatine, IL www.squared.com. 4. Steel City, Div Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com. 5. Thomas & Betts, Memphis, TN www.tnb.com. 6. Walker Systems Inc, Williamstown, www.wiremold.coni. 7. Wiremold Co, West Hartford, CT wivw.wiremold.com. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Confirm dimensions, ratings, and specifications of materials to be installed and coordinate these with site dimensions and with other Sections. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Interface With Other Work: 1. Coordinate with Divisions 22 and 23 for installation of raceway for control of plumbing and HVAC equipment. 2. Before rough -in, verify locations of boxes with work of other trades to insure that they are properly located for purpose intended. a, Coordinate location of outlet for water cooler with Division 22. b. Coordinate location of outlets adjacent to or in millwork with Division 06 before rough -in, Refer conflicts to Architect and locate outlet under his direction. 3. Coordinate installation of floor boxes in carpeted areas with carpet installer to obtain carpet for box doors. 4. Install pull wires in raceways installed under this Section where conductors or cables are to be installed under other Divisions, B. Conduit And Raceway: 1. Conceal raceways within ceilings, walls, and floors, except at Contractor's option, conduit may be exposed on walls or ceilings of mechanical equipment areas and above acoustical panel suspension ceiling systems. Install exposed raceway runs parallel to or at right angles to building structure lines. 2. Keep raceway runs 6 inches minimum from hot water pipes. 3. Make no more than four quarter bends, 360 degrees total, in any conduit run between outlet and outlet, fitting and fitting, or outlet and fitting. a. Make bends and offsets so conduit is not injured and internal diameter of conduit is not effectively reduced. b. Radius of curve shall be at least minimum indicated by NEC. 4. Cut conduit smooth and square with run and ream to remove rough edges. Cap raceway ends during construction. Clean or replace raceway in which water or foreign matter have accumulated. 5. Install insulated bushings on each end of raceway 1-114 inches in diameter and larger, and on all raceways where low voltage cables emerge. Install expansion fittings where raceways cross building expansion joints. 6. Run two spare conduits from each new panelboard to ceiling access area or other acceptable accessible area and cap for future use. 09070 (3118111) RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 -2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY - IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 7. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork where possible; otherwise. All roof penetrations shall be flashed, counter flashed and scaled per Roofing Contractor. Coordinate all roof penetrations with the Roofing Contractor. 8. Provide nylon pull string with printed footage indicators secured at each end of each empty conduit, except sleeves and nipples. Identify with tags at each end the origin and destination of each empty conduit, and indicate same on all empty or spare conduits on the as -built drawings. 9. Install expansion -deflection joints where conduit crosses building expansion, seismic, or structural isolation break (SIB) joints. 10. Where conduit penetrates fire -rated walls and floors, seal opening around conduit with UL -listed foamed silicone elastomer compound. Fill void around perimeter of conduits with nonmetallic nonshrink grount in all concrete or masonry walls. 11. Bend PVC conduit by hot box bender and, for PVC 2 inches in diameter and larger, expanding plugs. Apply PVC adhesive only by brush. 12. Installation In Framing: a. Do not bore holes in joists or beams outside center 113 of member depth or within 24 inches of bearing points. Do not bore holes in vertical framing members outside center 113 of member width. b. Holes shall be one inch diameter maximum. 13. Underground Raceway And Conduit: a. Bury underground raceway installed outside building 24 inches deep minimum. b. Bury underground conduit in planting areas 18 inches deep minimum. It is permissible to install conduit directly below concrete sidewalks, however, conduit must be buried 18 inches deep at point of exit from planting areas. 14. Conduit And Raceway Support: a. Securely support raceway with approved straps, clamps, or hangers, spaced as required. b. Do not support from mechanical ducts or duct supports without Architect's written approval. Securely mount raceway supports, boxes, and cabinets in an approved manner by: 1) Expansion shields in concrete or solid masonry. 2) Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units. 3) Wood screws on wood. 4) Metal screws on metal. 15. Prohibited Procedures: a. Use of wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry units for mounting raceway, supports, boxes, cabinets, or other equipment. b. Installation of raceway that has been crushed or deformed. C. Use of torches for bending PVC. d. Spray applied PVC cement. e. Boring holes in truss members. f. Notching of structural members. g. Supporting raceway from ceiling system support wires. h. Nail drive straps or tie wire for supporting raceway. C. Boxes: 1. Boxes shall be accessible and installed with approved cover. 2. Do not locate device boxes that are on opposite sides of framed walls in the same stud space. In other wall construction, do not install boxes back to back. 3. Locate boxes so pipes, ducts, or other items do not obstruct outlets. 4. Install outlets flush with finished surface and level and plumb. 5. Support switch boxes larger than two -gang with side brackets and steel bar hangers in framed walls. 6. At time of substantial completion, install blank plates on uncovered outlet boxes that are for future use. 7. Install air f vapor barrier back boxes behind outlet boxes that penetrate vapor barrier. 8. Location: a. Install boxes at door locations on latch side of door, unless explicitly shown otherwise on Drawings. Verify door swings shown on electrical drawings with architectural drawings, and report discrepancies to Architect before rough -in. Distance of switch boxes from jamb shall be within 6 inches of doorjamb. b. Arrange boxes for ceiling light fixtures symmetrically with respect to room dimensions and structural features, C. Properly center boxes located in walls with respect to doors, panels, furring, trim and consistent with architectural details. Where two or more outlets occur, space them uniformly and in straight lines with each other, if possible. d. Center ceramic tile boxes in tile. END OF SECTION 09070 (3118111) RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SECTION 26 0553 -ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable markers. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for electrical identification. 1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements B. In the event of conflict regarding electrical identification requirements between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Nameplates: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, minimum 3/16 inch high white letters on a black background. B. Wire and Cable Markers: Split sleeve or tubing type. Cloth or wraparound adhesive types not approved. C. Conductor -color Tape: Colored vinyl electrical tape. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates. B. Install nameplates and labels parallel to equipment lines. C. Secure nameplates to equipment fronts. Secure nameplate to outside face of panelboard doors. D. Embossed tape will not be permitted for any application. E. Electrical Contractor shall write the circuit number to which each device is connected on the inside of the box (clearly visible when device is removed) and on the backside sof each coverplatc. Use a permanent black marker. 09070 (3118/11) ELECTICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY - IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 3.02 WIRE IDENTIFICATION A. Conductors for power circuits to be identified per the following schedule. System Voltage Conductor 480Y/277V 208Y/120V Phase A Brown Black Phase B Orange Red Phase C Yellow Blue Neutral White with White orange stripe Grounding Green Green Isolated Ground Green with Green with yellow stripe yellow stripe Switchlcg (lighting) Purple Pink 3.03 NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE A. Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled below. B. Panelboards, Switchboards and Motor Control Centers: 3/16 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify voltage rating and source. C. Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches, and Motor Starters in Switchboards, and Motor Control Centers: 1/8 inch; identify source to device and the load it serves, including location. D. Individual Circuit Breakers, Enclosed Switches, and Motor Starters: 1/8 inch; identify load served and source. E. Transformers: 3/16 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify primary and secondary voltages, primary source, and secondary load and location. END OF SECTION 09070 (3/18/11) ELECTICAL IDENTIFICATION 260553 -2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGH.AM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 26 2726 -WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Device plates and box covers. D. Cords and caps. 1.02 RELATED WORK A, This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for wiring devices. 1. Section 26 0501 - Basic Electrical Requirements. B. In the event of conflict regarding requirements for wiring devices between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. FS W -C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet. B. FS W -S-896 - Switch, Toggle. C. NEMA WD I - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. D. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL SWITCHES. I -POLE 3 -WAY 4 -WAY W -PILOT A. Hubbell 1221 X 1223 X 1234 X 1221-P1 X B. P&S 20AC1 X 20AC3 X 20AC4 X 20ACI-CPL C. Leviton 1223 X 1223 X 1224 X D. Eagle 2221X 222.3X 2224X 2.42 WALL SWITCHES A. Wall Switches for Lighting Circuits FS W -S-896; ac general use snap switch with toggle rocker handle, rated 20 amperes and 120-277 volts ac, Handle: Standard color , to be selected, in all areas. Screw type terminals only. (Standards color shall include brown, gray, ivory, black or a white for all devices.) B. Pilot Light Type: Green pilot handle; handle lighted when switch is ON. C. Locator Type: Lighted handle. D. Provide 3 -way and 4 -way switches of matching style, appearance and specification as indicated on drawings. 09070 (3118111) WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RECEPTACLES MFGR. C.O.'S A. Hubbell 5352 X B. P&S 5352 X C. Leviton 5352 X D. Eagle 5362X 2.04 RECEPTACLES A. Convenience and Straight -blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 1. B. Locking -Blade Receptacles: NEMA WD 5. C. Convenience Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD 1; Type 5-20R. Nylon face: Standard color, to be selected, in all areas. Emergency receptacles: Red nylon face. (Standarad colors shall include brown, gray, ivory, black and white for all devices.) D. Weatherproof Receptacles: Receptacles as specified mounted in a cast steel box with gasketed, weatherproof device plate as specified. E. Specific -use Receptacle Configuration: NEMA WD I or WD 5; type as indicated on Drawings, brown nylon face. F. GFCI Receptacles: Duplex convenience receptacle with integral ground fault current interrupter. NEMA Type 5-20R. All units shall be feed -through type for downstream device protection. All receptacles indicated to be installed in a toilet room, bathroom, rooftop, and outdoors or within 6 feet of a sink, basin, tub or floor sink shall be GFIC protected 2.05 SPECIFIC PURPOSE RECEPTACLES A. NEMA WD 1 or WD 5; type as indicated on Drawings. B. Isolated Ground Type: Straight blade type 5-20R as indicated on the Drawings. Grey nylon face. C. Twist lock type. NEMA configuration as shown on the Drawings. 2.06 WALL PLATES A. Decorative Cover Plate: Stainless Steel in all areas. All isolated ground receptacle covers shall bear the engraved phrase "ISOLATED GROUND". B. Engraved Plates: Same plate as specified herein. Provide with engraved characters 1/8 inch high characters (all letters in upper case) with filler of black color. C. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Shall be Cast Aluminum in -use cover. 2.07 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CORDS AND CAPS A. Hubbell. B. Leviton. C. Pass and Seymour. 2.08 CORDS AND CAPS A. Straight -blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 1. B. Locking -blade Attachment Plug: NEMA WD 5. C. Attachment Plug Configuration: Match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment. 09070 (3/18/11) WIRING DEVICES 262726-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY - IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO D. Cord Construction: Oil -resistant thermoset insulated Type SO multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for hard usage in damp locations, E. Cord Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wall switches 48 inches above floor, OFF position down. B. Install convenience receptacles 18 inches above floor, 4 inches above backsplash, or as noted, in a vertical position with grounding pole to the down. C. Install specific -use receptacles at heights shown on Contract Drawings. D. Install convenience receptacles in 4 square box in a vertical position with the ground pole down. END OF SECTION 09070 (3118111) WIRING DEVICES 262726-3 a '� ,� .- • � r � ;�, �: ti„ , a MANWARING TESTING CENTER Construction Documents BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY - IDAHO Rexburg Idaho SECTION 26 5100 -LIGHTING FIXTURES PART] GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Lamps, B. Ballasts. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. This Section shall be used in conjunction with the following other specifications and related Contract Documents to establish the total requirements for lighting fixtures. 1. Section 16010 - Basic Electrical Requirements. 2. Section 16111 -Conduit 1.03 PART 2 2.01 2.03 2.04 2.05 2.06 PART 3 3.01 B. In the event of conflict regarding lighting fixture or equipment requirements between this Section and any other section, the provisions of this Section shall govern. SUBMITTALS A. As described in related sections. PRODUCTS EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES A. Enclosures: Complete with gaskets to form weatherproof assembly with wet label and removable prewired ballast if exposed to weather or with damp label if installed in building soffit. B. Provide low temperature ballasts, with reliable starting to minus 20 degrees F. C. When photocell is mounted on luminaire, provide factory mounted, UL listed unit gasketed for wet service. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS -LAMPS A. Sylvannia. (OSRAM) B. Contractor shall provide Sylvannia lamps and ballast for Sylvania warrantee. A. A. A. A. LAMPS Metal Halide HID Lamps: Clear. Suitable for all burning positions. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FLUORESCENT BALLASTS Sylvannia HID BALLASTS HID Ballast: ANSI CA; selected by luminaire manufacturer. Single lamp, high power factor, regulated output type. Mercury vapor and metal -Halide ballasts: limit lamp wattage variations to 5 percent for a line voltage change of 10 percent line current during starting and warm up not to exceed normal operation current, provide separate capacitor protection. EXECUTION INSTALLATION Furnish and install lamps in luminaries and lampholders. 09070 (3/18/11) LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 5100 - 1 MANWARING TESTING CENTER Construction Documents BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY - IDAHO Rexburg Idaho 3.02 RELAMPING A. Relamp luminaires which have failed lamps at completion of work. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of Work. Clean paint splatters, dirt, and debris from installed luminaires. END OF SECTION 09070 (3118111) LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 5100-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIG1 AM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO) SECTION 26 6210 — DATA SYSTEM CABLING GENERAL 1.0 The extent of data cabling for this project will consist of installing a new fiber optic cable as called out by addendum, from the Smith Building distribution rack to the existing MDF in the Library. Exact locations shall be determined in the field prior to bid. The Contractor shall visit the site and become familiar with all existing conditions. Base bid shall include accommodations for these conditions. The contractor shall include, in the base bid, all cable, components, terminations, labor, material, supervision etc. to complete this installation. See BYUI Telecommunications Standards for approved System Installers. 2.0 The following specification and its associated drawings are intended to provide a set of instructions and materials needed to furnish and install Telecommunications Cabling, within parameters set by industry standards. A. The information is modular in nature. 1. Each facility will have one or more of each module discussed. 2. Specifically included in this specification are cables, connecting hardware requirements to provide a Category 6A compliant link to each data port of the workstations. B. Some of the information contained in the following is directed to the owner's architects, electrical, mechanical, and structural engineers. This information points toward ideal conditions and may vary by site depending on actual conditions. 3.0 Cable and raceway installation and data room layouts shall conform to the following: BYU — Idaho Telecommunications Cabling standards with the following EXCEPTION: The horizontal cabling solution shall be a Category 6A, 10 -gigabit, solution in lieu of the category 6 cable specified. 2. Contractor shall provide and install all raceway, cable tray, J -hooks, cable, jacks, racks, patch panels, ladder tray etc. for a complete horizontal cabling system. 09070 (3n8/11) Data Cabling 266210-1 BYU-IDAHO TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING STANDARD 7th OF DEC 2006 REXBURG, IDAHO PREPARED BY ADAM STEVENS, RCDD Ty. 1 1 G BYU-Idaho Cabling Standard Table of Contents 1 General Information Page Contractors Lead Technicians Warranty Approved Cable Contractors 2 Telecommunication Rooms General 2 Location 2 List of installed components 2 Size 3 Pathways 4 Doorways and ceilings 4 Environmental Controls 4 Floor loading 5 Grounding and Bonding 5 Lighting 5 Walls and lining 6 Power 6 Telecommunication Rack Layout drawing 6 Telecommunication Room Example 7 3 Building Entrance Facilities General 7 Conduits 7 4 Backbone Distribution General 8 Riser 8 Testing 8 5 Horizontal Distribution General Horizontal pathways Conduits Cable Tray Cable Support Testing 6 Demolition General i Labeling Work Area locator Patch Panel Examples Riser and backbone S Fiber Approved fiber Splicing 9 Miscellaneous General Verification 10 10 10 13 13 14 14 14 15 16 16 I7 17 17 18 1. General Information Cable Contractor must meet the following requirements, and be placed on the approved Iist in Addendum A before bid acceptance. • Be certified and members of Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI)_ • Have a Registered Communications distribution Designer (RCDD) on staff. • SYSTIMAX Structured Cabling System cooper and fiber SYSTIMAX Certified VAR. A company must have 5 years of actual experience in copper and fiber installations, terminations and splicing. Must include splicing 1200 pair and larger copper cable and Splicing 288 count fiber cable. On site cable technician must understand and have been formally trained in voice, data, and fiber cabling, with 5 years experience. Must be a SYSTIMAX Certified installer. Contractor is required to have a Labor and Performance Bond equal to the value of the contract. Once on the job the lead technician is not to be pulled off. In the event that the lead Technician must leave, there shall be authorization given from the BYU-Idaho Information Technology (IT) Representative. BYU-Idaho has the right to remove any lead technician or other technician from the project for unacceptable work preformed. Contractor shall fix or replace any damaged materials, items, or properties that are damaged by the contractor. The repairs or replacement shall rneet or exceed the damaged materials, items, or properties. Contractors are to follow all NEC, NFPA, NESC, ANSI/TIAIEIA Standards, local codes, and this BYU-Idaho standard. Contractor must also adhere to all other codes and standards that apply. A contractor shall give warranty coverage, without limitation or qualifications, that all equipment, materials, and workmanship are in accordance with this document, ANSI/TIA/EIA Standards, contract bid document specifications, and local and national codes. The warranty coverage shall be a minimum of one year from the time of acceptance by BYU-Idaho IT Representative. Contractor must have authorization from the manufacture to provide product warranty. Included a contractor must be able to provide the SYTSTIMAX 24yrs SYSTIMAX warranty upon completion. Bids shall be received from pre -approved Cabling Contractor by BYU-Idaho, listed in addendum A 2. Telecommunications Rooms BYU-Idaho has Telecommunication Rooms also called BDFs or IDFs. Referred to as Telecommunication Closet formerly within the TIA/EIA standards, which has been updated to Telecommunication Rooms. These rooms house telecommunication cabling and equipment. This document shall use TR in referring to a Telecommunication Room, BDF, and IDF. TRs are spaces that provide a connection point between backbone and horizontal distribution pathways. Is the location for the distribution of horizontal cabling and equipment. It is recommended that there be one TR per building floor. Careful consideration must be taken when designing location of TRs. Horizontal Cable must not exceed 295 feet. This includes pathway routes, slack loops and service loops. TR's provide a physically secure location for telecommunication systems, which include: • Cables • Cross -connects • Rack and wall mounted equipment Each TR on BYU-Idaho Campus shall consist of the minimum: • CPI 19" Rack Qty 3 • CPI 6" Dual -sided Vertical Wire Managers Qty 4 • 19" Rack Installation Kit Qty 3 • Rack Grounding Kit Qty 3 • 18" Cable Runway (ladder Rack) • Wail Angle Support Kit Qty 4 • 3" Channel Rack -to -Rack Runway Mounting Plate Qty 3 • 6" Cable Retaining Posts Qty 12 For every CPI 19" Rack there shall be 6" Vertical wire Manager on both sides of the 19" Rack. For every CPI 19" Rack there shall be one 19" Rack installation kit. 2 For every row of CPT 19" Racks there shall be one Rack Grounding Kit. For every row of CPI 19" Racks there shall be one 18" Cable Runway. Cable Runway shall be designed over all CPI 19" Racks in the TR. The Cable Runway shall also be designed to house the 3ft service loop needed within a TR. The Cable runway shall also be routed to meet with all conduit sleeves, conduits, cable trays and pathways. TR is to house equipment only used for telecommunication systems. The use for power, storage, custodial, or any other system not related to the telecommunication systems is prohibited. Equipment not related to telecommunication support is not to pass through, enter or be installed within the TR. The minimum size of TR shall be. 12 X 10. The following are guidelines for expanding size. The size is crucial to the demand of Voice and Data integration, desk -to -desk information sharing, and incorporation of other buildings into a structured cabling system. The following as considerations for expansion • Size of the building + Floor space served • Building occupant needs • Telecommunication services used • future requirements, expansion and growth. The front rail of the Racks placed within a TR shall not be closer to the back wall than 4ft (See Diagram on page 6). The back rail of the Racks shall not be closer to the Front wall than 3f[ (See Diagram on page 6). The distance between two rows of Racks shall not be closer than 4fi. The measurement is to be taken from the front rail to front rail of Racks. Rack shall have IT approval before being set and mounted to the floors. When Racks are placed with rows, the Vertical Wire Managers shall be no less than 3ft from the wall at one end. Sprinkler heads shall only be installed if required be code. They shall be installed within a wire cage. Drainage troughs must be installed under sprinkler pipes. Pathways • There shall be a minimum of four 4inch conduits in a TR coming from the Building Entrance Facility. • There shall be four 4inch conduits installed in a TR for every serving floor. • When Cable tray is used, there shall be waterfall management installed when entering the TR and transition to the Cable Runway assembly. • Conduits or sleeves entering the TR shall protrude 3 inches. This includes floor, wall, and ceiling penetrations. • Conduits shall be reamed and have an insulated bushing installed. • Conduits shall not be allowed to remain open. Firestop putty shall be used to fill in the conduit. Firestop shall have been tested according to UL 1479, ASTM E814, and ASTM El 19. Doorways and Ceilings No ceiling is preferred within a TR. When a ceiling is required the minimum ceiling height shall be 8ft. 6in, from finished floor. To permit maximum flexibility and accessibility for cable pathways, false ceilings are not to be installed in TRs. TRs shall have fully opening doors, which shall swing outward. Doors thresholds are not allowed, as they hinder the movement of equipment. Center post is not permitted. Door width shall be a minimum of 36in. Doors shall be locked with key #4165. Environmental Controls TRs shall have a ambient temperature range between 641 and 751 degrees Fahrenheit. With a variance of no more than ± P degrees Fahrenheit in ambient temperature. Humidity range of 30% to 55%, Non condensing. Maintain continuous and dedicated HVAC 24 hours a day, 365 days per year. Maintain positive pressure with a minimum of one air change per hour. 4 Maintenance shall be performed to replace air filters on the Dedicated HVAC systems a rninimum of once per month. Floor Loading Floor loading shall be sufficient to bear the load of installed equipment, both distributed and centrated. A Minimum floor loading of 100 lbf/ft2. Tile, or polished concrete shall be installed instead of carpet, to avoid dust and static electricity. Grounding and Bonding Direct attachment to the closest point of the Building electrical grounding system shall be installed. This shall provide proper grounding equalization needed. For buildings with multiple TRs, a 3 Ott cable shall server as the Bus Bar Backbone, with a single termination to building ground. Connection to building electrical ground to be preformed by a licensed electrician, The minimum bonding to be used shall be 6 AWG of stranded copper conductor. Cable trays shall be properly grounded between sections. All racks, equipment, and cable shields shall be properly grounded. Applicable codes and standards; NEC 250, ANSI/NFPA 780, ANSI/ElA/TIA-607. Lighting Provide a minimum of 500 lux (50 foot-candles) measured 3ft above finished floor. Dimmer switch are not permitted. Lights shall be placed with consideration to placement of racks. It is preferred to have lights mounted on the walls facing each other, on both sides of the racks (see Diagram on page 6). There shall be a minimum of 12in. clearance of lighting from cable trays, and cable runways. The walls shall be painted white to enhance room lighting. Walls and lining Two walls shall be lined with 3/4 AC grade 8ft plywood. The plywood shall be fire -rated, or fire treated on all sides. Flush hardware and supports shall be used to mount plywood. Hardware shall be placed to hold sufficient support to handle load (static, dynamic and cabling components). Power Each TR will have a dedicated Electrical Panel, this panel will only supply power to the TR it is placed in, panel to be on Building UPS. There shall be a minimum of two dedicated 3 -wire 120V 20 amp circuits on E -power, UPS power if provide to building, each on separate branch circuits. There shall be two 30 amp 1 IOV circuits on Building UPS using NEMA 5-20R outlets. There shall be a minimum of two 120V 20 amp circuits on normal building power. These outlets are for use of tools, testers and ect. The following diagram is an EXAMPLE TR with the minimum requirements, and example rack layout. 12 FT 3. wilding Entrance Facilities 10 FT This is the point of which telecommunication services enter a building frorn the Campus Vault system. Conduits: A minimum of four 4inch conduits shall be installed for the telecommunication systems entering the building. There shall be no more than two 901 bends for every 300ft for entrance conduits. There shall be no bend greater than 90° Maximum bend radius is l OX inside diameter of conduit. For a 4in conduit the bend radius shall be no less than 40in. I of the conduits shall have four I inch innerducts installed. When 6 inch conduits are installed in place of 4 inch conduits, then 6 % inch innerducts shall be installed within one of the conduits. Conduits shall slope to the outside of the building entrance to avoid flood damage. A pull box shall be placed when the conduits enter the inner wall of the building. The conduit run shall continue until termination point, generally within a TR. Armored cable must terminate within 50ft when exposed from conduit, once entering the building. 4. Backbone Distribution Riser copper and fiber cable used to extend TR to another location. Riser cable shall meet industry standards for the environment the cable shall be installed. This shall be a shielded, fire resistant standard riser cable for use in riser shafts. Riser cable ran in conduit does not need to be armored cable. Outside copper backbone cable 24 gauge DFC. Cables shall be installed without sharp kinks or bends; 10 times the diameter of outer cable diameter is minimum bend radius for cable under no load. 20 times when under load. Testing Copper Backbone and Riser cables shall be tested using a DC continuity test. Fiber cable shall be tested in both directions. First using a light source and meter and then an OTDR tester. Multimode fiber shall be tested at 850 nm and 1300 nm. Singlemode fiber shall be tested at 1310 nm and 1550 nm. Splice loss shall be less than 0.2db per single strand test, not an average. Mated connector loss shall be less than 0.6db. BYU-Idaho shall receive both an electronic form and hardeopy of the test results. 5. Horizontal Distribution Horizontal Cable shall be a complete channel system solution installation. Anixter Level XP7. SYTSTIMAX GigaSpeed XL channel solution. Category 6, in compliance with most current draft. Also be covered under UL's performance verification program. Plenum cable shall be used where required. The color of the cable shall be white for new buildings and re -cabling of entire buildings. All other areas where green cable exists, green cable shall be used. BYU-Idaho IT prefers all faceplate, Wiremold, jacks, boxes be Electric Ivory. Or match existing decor of the building. Cables shall be neatly dressed within the Telecommunication Room JR). Tangled cables shall not be permitted. When cables enter the TR they shall be dressed and bundled with Velcro tie wraps. This means that cable shall be dressed neatly at first entry, while still in the cable tray, cable runway, vertical wire management, horizontal wire management, and the back of patch panels. Cable shall be grouped in 48 (approximant) cable bundles. Cabling runs shall not exceed 295ft. Every location shall have a minimum 3 cables. There shall be no pair splitting, or splicing of horizontal cable. At cable termination there shall be no more than % inch of wire pairs exposed from the outer jacket to termination. There shall be no untwisting of wire pairs before termination. Termination shall be T568B standard. 12" slack loop shall be placed for each cable at the work area end. Cables shall be installed without sharp kinks or bends; 4 times the outside diameter of horizontal cable is the minimum bend radius. Minimum Patchmax Panel shall be 48port. Horizontal cabling shall be terminated in numerical order on a Patch Panel. Example: 9 101, 102, 103. 6. Horizontal Pathways Cable shall be separated from lighting and other EMI sources of a minimum of 12inches. Minimum of 6inch separation from water pipes. Horizontal cabling shall be installed in `dry' locations, See NEC Article 100 for definitions on damp, dry and wet locations. For example, slab -on -grade construction where pathways are installed underground or in concrete slabs that are in direct contact with soil (e, g., sand, gravel, etc.) are considered to be "wet locations." Surface Raceway Surface Raceway is used only when necessary and is not the premier choice for cable installation. Color of surface Raceway shall be electric ivory, or match existing decor. See Division 16 of product specifications. Surface raceway shall be mounted with anchor hardware. Adhesive mounting shall not be permitted. Office environments shall have Wiremold 2300 series installed, with deep device box, and use Fiber/CATS radius corners. Limit of 8 cables shall be placed within this raceway system. Computer Labs shall have Panduit T-70 Series installed for Data only. When power and Data are ran in the same pathway, Panduit Twin -70 Series shall be installed. The BYU-IT Representative shall approve all Substitutions prior to bid. Conduits Conduit runs shall be no longer than 90ft without a pull box. There shall be no more than two 90° bends without a pull box. 90° shall be the maximum conduit bend allowed. All conduits and Innerducts shall have pull lines installed. 10 No more than 6 cables shall be installed within a I"conduit. The trade size of conduit shall increase for additional cables. The cable diameter of SYTSTIMAX 2071E Category 6 is .232inches. Inside Diameter MITI Trade Size Cagle Outside Diameter mm (in) 3.3 4.6 5.6 6.1 7.4 7.9 9.4 13.5 15.8 (0.13) (0.1$) (0.22) (0.24) (0.29) (0.31) (0.37) (0.53) (0.62) 17.8 (0.70) 16 1/2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 21 314 6 5 4 3 2 2 1 0 0 0 27 1 8 8 7 6 3 3 2 1 0 0 35 1-114 16 14 12 10 6 4 1 3 1 1 1 41 1-112 20 18 16 15 7 6 4 2 1 1 53 2 30 26 22 20 14 12 7 4 3 2 63 2-112 45 40 36 30 17 14 12 6 3 3 78 3 70 60 so 40 20 20 17 7 6 6 91 3-112 22 12 7 6 103 4 30 14 12 7 Width and depth of the junction boxes must be adequate for: • Fishing * Pulling • Looping the cable, Length must be at least 12 times the diameter of the largest conduit. Mininwil:i depth shall be 4" and minimum width shall be 8". The following figure is how conduits are to be placed within a junction box. Use this Not this N Conduits shall be reamed and have insulated bushings installed. Conduit runs ending at the cable tray shall ALL be at the same distance, which shall be 1" into the tray. With a minimum of 3" clearance from top of the cable tray, 12 Conduits shall not be allowed to remain open. Firestop putty shall be used to fill in the conduit. Firestop shall have been tested according to UL 1474, ASTM E814, and ASTM E119. Sleeves shall protrude 3 inches up from finished floor. Cable Tray Tray type: CFI FastTrak. Cables are to be neatly placed within the cable tray. No wires ties shall be used in cable tray. Cable shall not be tightly fitted around corners. There shall be at least a 3inch sweep around corners within the cable tray. Velcro wire ties shall be used when cable is not within the cable tray. Velcro wire ties shall not be tightly wrapped around cable. Velcro wire ties shall be spaced at 18 to 24 inches. Electrical tape or other adhesives are not permitted to replace a Velcro wire tic. Plastic wire ties are not permitted. Velcro ties shall be used in the TR to dress the cabling. Velcro ties shall start when cable enters the TR, and be spaced at 8 to 12 inches. There shall be proper support installed to allow `waterfall' of cabling from the cable tray to the ladder rack within the TR. Spine support is not permitted for installation. Cable support Erico Caddy CAT32 and CAT425 shall be used for cable support. The minimum J -hook size is 2inches. Cable retaining clips shall be placed on the J -hooks (These items are included with J -hooks boxes). 3 Velcro ties shall be used between J - hooks. J -hooks and Saddles shall be properly fastened, using Angle hanger brackets and beam clamps. Using wire to hang J -hooks is not permitted. The distance between J -hooks and Saddles shall be 4 to 5 feet. The distance is to be staggered between 4 and 5 feet and not installed on centers, to avoid harmonics. Sprinkler pipes, conduits, ducts, ceiling tiles shall not be used to support cable. There shall be no excessive slack left in the ceiling. With two Velcro tie wraps placed between J -hooks. 13 7. Testing Proposed Category b Cable shall be tested using a Fluke DTX 1200 or 1800 series tester. Contractors can also use Microtest OMNI Scanner as an alternate tester with BYU-Idaho IT approval. All test results must pass. The Autotest setting shall be set to SYTSTIMAX Gigaspeed testing. The cable designator shall be set to the proper cable type for propagation of delay. Gigaspeed adapters shall be used. The latest `ROM FLASH' shall be used on the Tester Unit. BYU-Idaho shall receive 1 electronic copy of the test results. Electronic copy shall be in the .FLW form for viewing with the Fluke LinkWare software. S. Demolition The contractor shall remove existing horizontal cabling that is no longer in use. This shall include the complete removal of the raceway system that the cable was also housed in. Partial removal of cabling is not acceptable. The removal and disposal of the cable is the responsibly of the contractor. 9. Labeling Work Area station locator shall be labeled to BYU-Idaho Standards. Labels shall be located on the top or on the left (as show in the following figure), and shall be printed in 12pt Bold Font. Designator shall read: AAA -###-1 or AAA -###X-1 AAA = Three letter Building Designator. ### = Room number in which the faceplate is located_ ###X = Room number with a letter. Example 440B 14 I = The number the location is within the room. Locations shall be read clock -wise (left to right) around the room. The number for location shall start with 1. Within the TR PatchMax locators shall be labeled: ###-1-J Example: 440-2-B The `J' addition indicates the position of the Cable within the Location. A, B, or C. Cables shall be labeled using a Brady Id Pro Plus or compatible labeler, Cable shall be labeled at both ends of termination and be placed 3" from termination point. Label indicator on the cable shall read: AAA -###-1-J Example: SMI -440-2-B, the following images are examples only. Labeling copy shall be given to BYU-Idaho, in electronic form. This copy is for database purposes. BYU-Idaho has a labeling outline for the Patch -Max Panels and XL Panels in Microsoft Excel format. The copy shall be given to BYU-Idaho in Excel format. 15 Riser Copper pairs shall begin with the number I and continue. Riser Fiber cable shall begin with the number I and continue. Copper Backbone cabling shall be labeled according to direction given by BYU-Idaho IT Representative. Fiber Backbone cabling shall be labeled according to direction given by BYU-Idaho IT Representative. 16 A] AAA -#-1-J �l Riser Copper pairs shall begin with the number I and continue. Riser Fiber cable shall begin with the number I and continue. Copper Backbone cabling shall be labeled according to direction given by BYU-Idaho IT Representative. Fiber Backbone cabling shall be labeled according to direction given by BYU-Idaho IT Representative. 16 A] 'l El El Riser Copper pairs shall begin with the number I and continue. Riser Fiber cable shall begin with the number I and continue. Copper Backbone cabling shall be labeled according to direction given by BYU-Idaho IT Representative. Fiber Backbone cabling shall be labeled according to direction given by BYU-Idaho IT Representative. 16 10. Fiber Lucent and Corning fibers are the approved types of fiber for BYU-Idaho. On a project the same manufacture of fiber shall be used, no mismatching permitted. Outside Plant fiber shall be All -dielectric Loose Tube. Loose tube breakout kits shall also be used. Minimum fiber count shall be 24 Singlemode and 24 Multirnode. All backbone and Riser Fiber shall be installed in Innerduct. Fusion splicing is the only fiber splice approved on BYU-Idaho. Fiber shall be terminated within a LIU. SYTSTIMAX LSTIU_ Using SYTSTIMAX ST II+ connectors. There shall be a minimum 1Qft slack loop of fiber within every TR. Fiber shall always be installed in Innerduct. Innerduct Couplers shall be used to join pieces of innerduct together. Plenum rated innerduct shall be installed where required. 11. Miscellaneous BYU-Idaho adheres to new standards and codes that may be published and that are not mentioned in this docurnent. Contractors are expected to follow these new standards and codes. The design and installation must adhere to the specifications in this document. Along with the ANSI/TlA/EIA Standards and the Telecommunication Distribution Methods Manual 9 (TDMM). Changes and updates made to theses standards shall be applied to as the original. BYU-Idaho must approve any exceptions, and/or suggestions not covered in this specification, before design and installation. BYU-Idaho Telecommunication Department Staff shall do the design for TR layout. Along with the location of work area outlets. All designed conduit runs, cable tray, cable runways; surface raceway paths must first be approved by BYU-Idaho Infrastructure Department Staff. 17 The following punch list items shall be completed before a projected is signed off. • All test results shall be given to the BYU-Idaho IT Representative. • Minimum of 20% of randomly selected Work Area Outlets shall be checked for proper labeling and proper termination. • Minimum of 80% of horizontal pathways shall be inspected. • All cable dressing within TR shall be inspected. • All As -built drawings that contractor has are given to the BYU-Idaho Infrastructure Department Staff. • Any item that does not conform to BYU-Idaho Standards shall be redone until it conforms to the BYU-Idaho Standards. The following attached Verification sheet is to be filled out by all those who have any dealing with the cabling infrastructure. This includes the following: • All employees of the cabling contractor that shall be working on BYU-Idaho. • All Technical Staff of BYU-Idaho. • BYU-Idaho Employees that have any transaction, contact, or communication with the cable infrastructure or contractor. • All engineer, designers, consultants with influence, or control regarding the IT infrastructure. 18 Addendum A Pre -approved Contractors.- Cache ontractors: Cache Valley Electric 2345 South John Henry Dr. Salt Lake City, UT 84119 Phone; 801-908-2680 Fax: 801-908-7041 System Tech Inc. 1 1130 Arabian Way Boise, ID 83709 Phone: 208-362-6493 Fax: 208-362-4311 (Outside Plant Only) Niels Fugal Sons Company 1005 South Main P.O. Box 650 Pleasant Grove, UT 84062 Phone: 801-785-3152 Fax: 801-785-5844 Verification Sheet I , have read and understand the BYU- IDAHO TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING STANDARD. All questions that I have regarding this Standard or Cabling Infrastructure shall be directed to BYU-Idaho Infrastructure Department Staff. I will use this standard along with all other local and national codes and standards in designing, installing, and testing the Cabling Infrastructure. I understand that all changes, additions, or ideas about the cabling Infrastructure must be reviewed and passed by the BYU-Idaho Infrastructure Department Staff. Signature Please send Verification to. Adam Stevens 525 S Center St. Rexburg, ID 83460 208-496-2899 208-496-6899 stevensa@byui.edu CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SECTION 31 1000 -SITE CLEARING PART I - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Protecting existing groundcovers, plants, and grass to remain. 2. Removing existing trees, shrubs, groundcovers, plants, and grass. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. S. Removing above- and below -grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities. 7. Temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. B, Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and temporary erosion and sedimentation control procedures. 2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for verifying utility locations and for recording field measurements. 3. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for partial demolition of site elements. 4. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface -soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; and free of subsoil and weeds, roots, toxic materials, or other nonsoil materials. 09070 (3/18/11) SITE CLEARING 31 1000- 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP A. Except for stripped topsoil or other materials indicated to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Photographs, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing. B. Record drawings, according to Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents," identifying and accurately locating capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site -clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruet streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing site clearing indicated on property adjoining Owner's property will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract. 1. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property until directed by Architect. C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures are in place. 09070 (311$111) SITE CLEARING 31 1000-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Requirements for satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 1. Obtain approved borrow soil materials off-site when satisfactory soil materials are not available on-site. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. 1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL A. Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. C. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal. 3.3 UTILITIES A. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor. 1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing. B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed. 1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 09070 (3118111) SITE CLEARING 31 1000-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. D. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed. 3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Grind stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within tree protection zone. 5. Chip removed tree branches and dispose of off-site. B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within tree protection zones. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 09070 (3118111) SITE CLEARING 31 1000-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS A. Remove existing above- and below -grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction. B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated. 1. Unless existing full -depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw -cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw -cut faces vertically. 2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain to prevent corrosion. 3.7 DISPOSAL A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 31 1000 09070 (3118111) SITE CLEARING 31 1000- 5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Preparing subgrades for slabs -on -grade, walks, and pavements. 2. Drainage course for slabs -on -grade. 3. Subbase course for concrete walks. 4. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. B. Related Sections include the following: I. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for recording preexcavation and earthwork progress. 2. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities. 3. Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures. 4. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below -grade improvements and utilities. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low -strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over bedding to fill a trench. B. Base Course: Course placed between the subbase course and cement concrete. C. Bedding Course: Course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Bedrock: for the purposes of this Project, Overlying reasonably solid layer of volcanic rock, approximately 2 to 3 feet thick, or the volcanic rock under this solid layer that is generally very jointed, fractured and broken into boulder and cobble -sized particles which is still intact, with few, in any, significantly thick fractures or scams filled with soil. 09070 {3118111} EARTH MOVING 31 2000 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO E. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill. F. Drainage Fill or Drainage Course: Course supporting the slab -on -grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. G. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. a. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial Nvork directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation. H. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. I. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted: 1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late -model, track -mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42 -inch- wide, maximum, short -tip -radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138 -hp flywheel power with bucket -curling force of not less than 28,090 Ibf and stick -crowd force of not less than 18,650 lbf; measured according to SAE J- 1179.Bulk Excavation: Late -model, track -mounted loader; rated at not less than 210 -hp flywheel power and developing a minimum of 48,510-lbf breakout force with a general- purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732. J. Structures: footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. K, Subbase Course: Course placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement meeting a specific gradation. L. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. M. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 09070 (3118111) EARTH MOVING 31 2000-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Each type of plastic warning tape. 2. Filter fabric. B, Samples: 12 -by -12 -inch Sample of filter fabric. C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698 for each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. D. Seismic Survey Report: For record purposes; from seismic survey agency. E. Preexcavation Photographs: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earthwork operations. Submit before earthwork begins. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Data indicating subsurface conditions has been made available to the Contractor for convenience and may not serve as a reliable representations of site conditions. All locations that may require excavation may not have been probed. The Owner will not be held responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from the provided data. B. Excavation Requirements: Extend building excavations below slabs to levels specified. Remove loose, fractured, or disturbed pieces of bedrock along near -vertical faces if applicable. Where horizontal surfaces of bedrock exceed slope of 1 foot rise per 10 feet at base of excavations, either step or flatten surface of bedrock. C. Site Utility Information: Record data on known existing utilities is indicated on the Drawings and has not been verified. Contractor will confirm actual locations of existing utilities and identify possible coordination requirements. D. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. 09070 (3118/11) EARTH MOVING 31 2000- 3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1. Notify Contractor and University not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission. 3. Contact utility -locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. E. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General: Provide approved borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 5 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter as approved by soils inspector. C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CII, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups. D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, 6 inch minus uncrushed aggregate base. I . Uncrushed aggregate base is to meet the following gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing 6 inch 100% No. 4 15%-60% No. 200 0-5% 2. The portion of fine aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve is to be less than 60% of the portion passing the No. 40 sieve. 3. Liquid limit of fine aggregate passing the No. 40 sieve is to be Iess than 25. 4. Plasticity index is not to exceed 6. 5. Sand equivalent to be no less than 25. E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of crushed gravel, crushed stone, and or crushed sand; 314 minus crushed aggregate base. Crushed aggregate base is to meet the following gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1 inch 100% 314 inch 90%-100% No. 4 40%-65% 09070 (3/18/11) EARTH MOVING 312000-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO No. 8 30%- 50% No. 200 3%-9% 2. The portion of fine aggregate passing the No. 200 sieve is to be less than 60% of the portion passing the No. 40 sieve. 3. Liquid limit of fine aggregate passing the No. 40 sieve is to be less than 25. 4. Plasticity index is not to exceed 6. 5. Sand equivalent to be no less than 30. F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -Inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve. G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand. Type 1 bedding material: 3/4 inch, 60% crushed or fractured (at least on one side) gravel and sand meeting the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1 inch 100% 3/4 inch 80% - 100% 3/8 inch 20%-70% No. 4 5%-20% No.8 0-5% No. 200 0-3% H. Drainage Fill: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse -aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1 -1/2 -inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve. I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse -aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a f- inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve. J. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state. K. Structural Backfill: well graded 4 inch minus granular material as approved by testing agency. L. Fill and Backfill: Satisfactory soil materials. 2.2 FILTER FABRIC A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle -punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced: Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288.Grab Tensile Strength: 157 1bf; ASTM D 4632. 09070 (3/18/11) EARTH MOVING 312000-5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 3. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 4. Tear Strength: 56 lbf; ASTM D 4533. 5. Puncture Strength: 56 IV; ASTM D 4833.Apparent Opening Size: No. 70 sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751.Permittivity: 0.1 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491.UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours" exposure; ASTM D 4355. B. Subgrade Separation Geotextile: Nonwoven or woven Geotextile manufactured for subgrade separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50%, complying with ASTM D4632 and the following measured properties and their test method: 1. Grab Tensile Strength: 510 lbf; ASTM D 4632 2. Tear Strength: 1801bf; ASTM D4533 3. Puncture Strength: 180 lbf; ASTM D4833 4. Apparent Opening Size: No. 30 sieve, maximum; ASTM D4751 5. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D4491 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali -resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows unless indicated otherwise in Campus standards (Verify with Campus standards): 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Data/Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. B. Preparation of subgrade for earthwork operations including removal of vegetation, topsoil, debris, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface is specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing." C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls, which are specified in Division 31 Section "Site Clearing," during earthwork operations. 09070 (3118111) EARTH MOVING 31 2000-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 3.2 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. I. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Provide and maintain pumps, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 3.3 EXCAVATION, GENERAL A. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross- sectioned by Architect. 1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. B. Over -Excavation Requirements: All footings are intended to bear on sound bedrock. Where over -excavation occurs, footings may be poured thicker or the foundation walls may be extended as approved by Architect. Over -excavated areas below concrete slabs are to be filled with engineered compact fill. It is the responsibility of the contractor to confirm existing subgrade elevations and provide additional fill and/or concrete where required and at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus 0 or minus 1 foot, If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Clean bottom of excavation and place lean - mix concrete fill. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing lean -mix concrete fill. 2. Excavation for Underground Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus 0 or minus 6 inches. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces. 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. 09070 (3/18/11) EARTH MOVING 31 2000-7 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. 1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit. C. Trench Bottoms. Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade. 1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter and flat-bottomed, multiple - duct conduit units, hand -excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade. 2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill. 3. Excavate trenches 6 inches below invert elevation of utility lines and 2 feet wider than outside diameter of pipe, but not less than 3 feet minimum trench width unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. 4. Excavate trenches 12 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course. 3.7 SUBGRADE INSPECTION A. Notify Soils Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Owner determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. C. Authorized additional excavation will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices as indicated herein. D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation. 3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28 -day compressive strength of 2000 psi, may be used when approved by Architect. 09070 (3/18/11) EARTH MOVING 31 2000- 8 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect. 2. Where indicated widths of utility trenches are exceeded, provide stronger pipe, or special installation procedures, as required by the Architect. 3. Unauthorized excavations are to be at no cost to the Owner or Architect. 3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. Stockpile where directed by Owner. 3.10 BACKFILL A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Accepted construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork where required. S. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. Place and compact bedding course on rock and other unyielding bearing surfaces and to fill unauthorized excavations. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. C. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete." D. Place and compact bedding of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 6 inches over the utility pipe or conduit. 1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. 09070 (311$111) EARTH MOVING 312000-9 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO E. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while installing and removing shoring and bracing. F. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation. I . Coordinate backfilling with testing of utilities. G. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs. 3.12 SOIL FILL A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material. B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows; I. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use subbase or base material or satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use subbase material fill. 4. Under building slabs, use drainage course fill.Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill. C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. 3.13 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. 1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight. 3.14 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand -operated tampers. B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557: 09070 (3118111) EARTH MOVING 31 2000- 10 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 90 percent. D. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent. 3.15 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 112 inch Insert tolerance. C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 112 inch when tested with a 10 -foot straightedge. 3.16 DRAINAGE COURSE A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice. B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast -in-place concrete slabs - on -grade as follows: 1. Install subdrainage geotextile filter fabric on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends. 2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. 3.17 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perforin field quality -control testing. 09070 (3118/11) EARTH MOVING 31 2000- 11 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY -- IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of Subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect. D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be perfonned at the following locations and frequencies: Paved and Building Slab Areas: At Subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least 1 test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than 3 tests. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than 2 tests. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least 1 test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than 2 tests. E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained. 3.18 PROTECTION A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact. C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.19 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Transport surplus satisfactory soil off site. 09070 (3/18/11) EARTH MOVING 31 2000- 12 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 312000 09070 (3/18/11) EARTH MOVING 31 2000- 13 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 32 1313 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete pavement for the following: 1. Curbs and gutters. 2. Walkways. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for planter walls, retaining walls, planter slabs, footings and foundations, general applications of concrete. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for subgrade preparation, grading, and subbase course. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast -furnace slag. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete pavement mixture. Include alternate mixture designs when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. C. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 09070 (3118111) CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313- 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIG14AM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 5. Curing compounds. b. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 7. Joint fillers. E. Minutes of preinstallation conference. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved by the Owner to install concrete paving. Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has a minimum of 5 years experience specializing in installing concrete paving similar to that required for this Project. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready -mixed concrete products who complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. D. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures. E. Mockups: Cast mockups of full-size sections of concrete pavement to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, color, and standard of workmanship. 1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting construction. 4. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed pavement. 5. Demolish and remove mockups that do not meet Architect's requirements from the site.Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division I Section "Project Coordination" and the following: Before installing portland cement concrete paving, meet with representatives of authorities having jurisdiction, Owner, Architect, consultants, independent testing agency, and other concerned entities to review requirements, Notify participants at least 5 working days before conference. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. 09070 (3118/11) CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 FORMS A. Form Materials: Face farms for exposed concrete wall surfaces with smooth tempered masonite or plastic coated forms of as large a dimension as possible as approved by the Owner's Representative. Elsewhere, construct forms of plywood or approved patented form boards with plywood facings having as large a unit dimension as possible. Use 2 by 4 inch nominal size SIE dimension stock studs for wall forms, spaced not farther apart than sixteen inches on center. Drive board up tight and secure each board to each support with not less than two 6d box nails. Solidly back plywood to preclude buckling and bulging between supports. Forms for concrete slabs on grade may be two-inch thick material of sufficient width to avoid exposure of rough concrete, in finished work. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a 100 foot or less radius. B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form -release agent with a maximum of 350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Plain -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, fabricated from as -drawn steel wire into flat sheets. B. Deformed -Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497, flat sheet. C. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deforned. D. Epoxy -Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed bars. E. Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A 184/A 184M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars; assembled with clips. F. Plain Steel Wire: ASTM A 82. G. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. 09070 (3/18/11) CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313 -3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO H. Epoxy -Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 775/A 775M; with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain steel bars. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete, and as follows: 1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials matching materials used for existing campus paving and of the same type, brand, and source throughout the Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1/I1, white. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. B. Normal -Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years` satisfactory service in similar pavement applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials. 1. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to Owner's Representative. 2. Maximum Coarse -Aggregate Size: 42B.Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M. D. Air -Entraining Admixture: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260 a. Protex AES. E. Sand: ASTM C33, Walters MA -22. F. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. a. Procrete N. 09070 (3/18/11) CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2.5 FIBER REINFORCEMENT A. Synthetic Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for use in concrete pavement, complying with ASTM C 1116, Type 111, 1/2 to 1-112 inches long. 1. Products: a. Monofilament Fibers: 1) Axim Concrete Technologies; Fibrasol IIP. 2) Euclid Chemical Company (The); Fiberstrand 100. 3) FORTA Corporation; Forta Mono. 4) Grace, W. R. & Co. --Conn.; Grace MicroFiber. 5) Metalcrete Industries; Polystrand 1000. 6) SI Concrete Systems; Fibermix Stealth. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Polyethylene sheet or water -proof Kraft paper held snug against the surface by weights and sand along edges; or sprayed -on curing compound of a sodium silicate base. Approved manufacturers: a. Acuricon - Anti -Hydro Waterproofing Company, Newark, N.J. b. Ashford Formula - Curecrete Chemical Company, Orem, UT. C. Cenco Scal 301 - Century Concrete Chem, Orem, UT. d. SandSoil - Sonneborn Building Products, Minneapolis, MN. B. All scaler shall be applied strictly according to manufacturers directions. 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation -Joint -Filler Strips: Scaltight by W.R. Meadows Inc., or Architect prior to bid approved equivalent.. B. Joint Filler Manufacturer: I . Burkey-Keyed Kocd Joint by the Burke Co., San Metco, CA. 2. Keyed Kold Joint by Keyhold, Inc. Belmont, CA 3. Equivalent, approved by Architect prior to bidding. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal -weight concrete detennined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience. 09070 (3/18111) CONCRETE PA'C'ING 32 1313- 5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1. The BYU Idaho standard concrete mix design filed with the local concrete companies shall be used for all work. BYU Idaho mix design number is 192 -RC class 40 F. All concrete shall be ordered by the contractor. 2. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete mixture designs for the trial batch method. Do not use the Owner's field quality -control testing agency. B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal -weight concrete with the following properties: Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi.Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45.Slump Limit: 3 inches with 5 inches maximum. C. Add air -entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal -weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows: Air Content: 6-112 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent unless recommended otherwise by manufacturer. D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use water -reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability and when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements as follows: Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent maximum. F. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mix at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd.. G. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. 2.9 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready -Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. 2. Mixing time should be a minimum of 1 minute. Increase mixing time 15 seconds for each additional yard of concrete or fraction thereof in excess of one cubic yard. 09070 (3/18111) CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIG1 AM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances. B. Proof -roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. C. Proceed with concrete pavement operations only after nonconforming conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for pavement to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. B. Check completed formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 1. Top of Forms: Not more than 118 inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 114 inch in 10 feet. C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form -release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage. D. When directed by the Owner's Representative, remove defective concrete from the site and be replaced with concrete that complies with specifications. Concrete Work shall be deemed defective and may be rejected for any one of the following reasons: 1. Concrete work is not formed as indicated. 2. Concrete work is not pitched to drain as indicated. 3. Concrete work is not true to the intended alignment. 4. Concrete work is not plumb or level where so intended. 5. Concrete work is not true to the intended grades and levels. 6. Concrete work has voids or rock pockets that have not been filled. 7. Concrete work has sawdust, wood or debris embedded in voids or rock pockets. 8. Concrete work does not fully conform to the provisions of the specifications. 09070 (3118111) CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313 -7 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. Verify reinforcement required with applicable civil and structural drawings. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond -reducing materials. C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. E. Epoxy -Coated Reinforcement: Use epoxy -coated steel wire ties to fasten epoxy -coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged epoxy coatings with epoxy repair coating according to ASTM D 3963/1)3963M. F. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities, or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2 -inch overlap of adjacent mats. G. Minimum clear distance between any bar and the form shall be as follows: I . Weather side of exterior wall: 2 inches. 2. Wall surfaces not exposed to weather: 1 inch. 3. Concrete beams and columns: 1 1/2 inch. 4. Slabs: 3/4 inch. S. Above bottoms of footings: 3 inches. H. Do not make splices at points of maximum stress and, where made, lap splices 40 diameters unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or otherwise required to develop strength of bars. Stagger lap splices. I. Support bar reinforcing for concrete laid on earth in its proper position by means of short lengths of bars driven into earth at frequent intervals as directed, with reinforcing securely wired thereto. J. Run steel reinforcing bars continuous through cold joints. Provide dowels required to receive and engage subsequent work of sufficient length to develop strength of the bar and to securely set into forms prior to placing concrete. Provide dowels at construction joints, places where steps, etc., join concrete walls and where slabs are poured onto walls. Use dowels at 24 inches center to center to connect and prevent vertical separation of old walks from new walks. 09070 (3/18/11) CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313- 8 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edgings true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete with no pointed corners at joints. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline, unless otherwise indicated. When joining existing pavement, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of pavement and at locations where pavement operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless pavement terminates at isolation joints. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of pavement strips, unless otherwise indicated. Provide tie bars at sides of pavement strips where indicated. Doweled Joints: Install slip dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt -coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. Provide construction joints so that there is no more than no more than 7 feet between construction joints or between construction joint and expansion joint. C. Isolation (Expansion) Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint -filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 40 feet, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than '/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint -filler sections together. 6. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. 7. Provide expansion joints so that there is no more than 50 feet between expansion or contraction joints. D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened -plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows (match jointing of existing adjacent concrete pavement if applicable): Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 114 -inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete surfaces.Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond -rimmed blades. Cut 118 -inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before developing random contraction cracks.Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars 09070 (311$111) CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313-9 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. E. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating with an edging tool to a 1/4 -inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate too] marks on concrete surfaces. 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work. B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces. C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. D. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. F. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing. G. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. 1. When concrete placing is interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. H. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Deep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices. Place concrete in two operations; strike off initial pour for entire width of placement and to the required depth below finish surface. Lay welded wire fabric or fabricated bar mats immediately in final position. Place top layer of concrete, strike off, and screed. Remove and replace concrete that has been placed for more than 15 minutes without being covered by top layer, or use bonding agent if approved by Architect. J. Screed paved surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. 09070 (3/18/11) CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313- 10 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO K. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments. L. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete. M. When adjoining pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained 85 percent of its 28 -day compressive strength. N. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. I . When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. 0. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot -weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water -soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog -spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. 3.7 FLOAT FINISHING A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations. Match finishes with adjoining existing pavement where applicable. Verify finishes required with campus standards. B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed -water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes within a tolerance of 114 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10 -foot -long straightedge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 09070 (3/18/11) CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313 - 11 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO Medium -to -Fine -Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across float -finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine -line texture. 3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold -weather protection. C. Evaporation Control: In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation -control material. Apply according to manufacturers instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before floating. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture -retaining -cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moist Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: a. Water. b. Two inches of sand kept continuously wet. C. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12 -inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture -Retaining -Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Remove no forms during curing period unless protection as specified is applied to surfaces from which forms are removed. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Employ a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement as follows: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive - strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes. 09070 (3118/11) CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313- 12 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO b. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive - strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air - entrained concrete. C. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each set of compressive -strength specimens. d. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive -strength test, unless directed otherwise. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory -cured test specimens except when field -cured test specimens are required. e. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. Test one specimen at 7 days, test two specimens at 28 days, and retain one specimen in reserve for later testing if required. 2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.. 3. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory - cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete. 4. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. B. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in paving, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7 -day and 28 -day tests. C. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. D. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of the concrete when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. 3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet the requirements of this Section. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive. 09070 (3118/11) CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313- 13 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep concrete paving not more than 2 days prior to date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections. E. During the progress and upon completion of this work, surplus and waste materials resulting from the operations, including disused implements of service employed therein, shall be removed from the premises, and the entire structure and involved portions of the site, insofar as the work of this section is concerned, shall be left in a neat, clean and acceptable condition. F. Safety: Suitable barricades, lights, signs, flashers, and other safety devices for preventing injury or damage to traffic or individuals shall be furnished by the Contractor. All these devices shall be approved by BYU Idaho, but this approval shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for their adequacy or for conducting a completely safe operation. END OF SECTION 32 1313 09070 (3/18/11) CONCRETE PAVING 32 1313- 14 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SECTION 32 1373 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS PART ] - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cold -applied joint sealants. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 32 1313 "Concrete Paving" for constructing joints in concrete pavement. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 112 -inch- wide joints fonned between two 6 -inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. Pavement -Joint -Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint -sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint -sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint -sealant formulation. 4. Joint -sealant color. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. 09070 (3118111) CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 1373 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits pennitted by joint - sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint -sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint -sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 COLD -APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS A. Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic -Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR -200. 23 JOINT -SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint -sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint -sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Round Backer Rods for Cold -Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 3, of diameter and density required to control joint -sealant depth and prevent bottom -side adhesion of sealant. 09070 (3118111) CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 1373 -2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2.4 PRIMERS A. Primers: Product recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint - sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint -sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Joint -Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install joint -sealant backings of kind indicated to support joint sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint -sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint -sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent joint -sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install joint sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 09070 (3118111) CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 1373-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1. Place joint sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint -sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint: 1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint -sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. F. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess joint sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses, by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants, during and after curing period, from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations in repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. 3.6 PAVEMENT -JOINT -SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint -Sealant Application: Joints within cement concrete pavement. Joint Location: a. Expansion and isolation joints in cast -in-place concrete pavement. b. Contraction joints in cast -in-place concrete slabs. C. Other joints as indicated. 2. Urethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: Multicomponent, pourable, traffic -grade. 3. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. END OF SECTION 32 1373 09070 (3118111) CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 32 1373-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SECTION 32 3223 - SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes single -depth segmental retaining walls with soil reinforcement. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation for segmental retaining walls. 2. Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for retaining wall footings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide segmental retaining walls capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads due to soil pressures resulting from grades indicated, and determined according to NCMA's "Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls." 1. Include the effects of sloped backfill as indicated on Drawings. 2. Include the effects of superimposed loads (surcharge) as indicated on Drawings. B. Seismic Performance: Provide segmental retaining walls capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. For installed systems indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B. Samples for Verification: For each color and texture of concrete unit required. Submit full-size units. Include one full-size unit for each type of concrete unit required, C. Qualification Data: For Installer, foreman, and professional engineer. 09070 (3118111) SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 323223 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers and foreman comply with specified requirements. Include the following: a. Certification that installer and foreman on project meet qualification requirements. b. Certification that Installers have successfully completed NCMA training. C. Photographs of at least 5 projects of similar scope installed by Installer and by foreman. D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For segmental retaining wall system. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for segmental retaining wall units and soil reinforcement. I . Include test data for freeze -thaw durability of segmental retaining wall units. F. Product Certificates: For segmental retaining wall units and soil reinforcement, signed by product manufacturer. 1. Include test data for shear strength between segmental retaining wall units according to NCMA SRWU-2. 2. Include test data for connection strength between segmental retaining wall units and soil reinforcement according to NCMA SRWU-l. G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For segmental retaining wall units and soil reinforcement. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer, trained by NCMA in the installation of manufacturer's products, with a minimum of 5 years experience installing segmental retaining walls similar in scope to this project and who can provide photographs of at least 5 installations similar in scope to this project. B. Foreman Qualifications: Installer's foreman who has had a minimum of 10 years experience with segmental retaining wall installations similar in scope to that of this project. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store and handle concrete units and accessories to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, breaking, chipping, or other causes. B. Store geosynthetics in manufacturer's original packaging with labels intact. Store on elevated platforms, protected from moisture, sunlight, chemicals, flames, temperatures above 160 deg F or below 32 deg F, and other conditions that might damage them. Verify identification of geosynthetics before using and examine them for defects as material is placed. 09070 (3/18/11) SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 323223-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHA M YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: I. Segmental Retaining Wall Units: a. Licensees of Keystone Retaining Wall Systems, Inc. 2. Soil Reinforcement: a. Civil Engineering Fabrics; a division of BP Amoco Chemicals. b. Colbond Geosynthetics. C. HUESKER, Inc. d. Luckenhaus, Inc. e. Strata Systems, Inc. f. TC Mirafi. g. Tensar Earth Technologies, Inc. h. Versa -Lok Retaining Wall Systems; a division of Kiltie Corp. 2.2 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL UNITS A. Concrete Units: ASTM C 1372, Normal Weight, except that units shall not differ in ])eight more than plus or minus 1116 inch from specified dimension. 1. Provide units that comply with requirements for freeze -thaw durability. B. Colors: Match units installed at adjacent areas. C. Shapes: Provide units matching basic shape, dimensions, and face texture matching other units installed adjacent to site. D. Cap Units: Provide cap units of same shape as other units with smooth, as -cast top surfaces without holes or lugs. E. Special Units: Provide corner units, end units, and other shapes as needed to produce segmental retaining walls of dimensions and profiles indicated and to provide texture on exposed surfaces matching face. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Soil Reinforcement: Product specifically manufactured for use as soil reinforcement and as follows: I . Product Type: As determined by Architect. 09070 (3118111) SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 323223-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Direct manufacturer to test and inspect each roll of soil reinforcement at factory for minimum average roll values for geosynthetic index property tests including the following: 1. Weight. 2. Roll size. 3. Grab or single -rib strength. 4. Aperture opening. 5. Rib or yarn size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for excavation tolerances, condition of subgrades, and other conditions affecting performance of segmental retaining walls. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 RETAINING WALL INSTALLATION A. General: Place units according to NCMA's "Segmental Retaining Wall Installation Guide" and segmental retaining wall unit manufacturer's written instructions. Lay units in running bond. 1. Form corners and ends by using special units or splitting units with mason's hammer and chisel. B. Leveling Base: Place and compact base material to thickness indicated and with not less than 95 percent maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698. At Contractor's option, unreinforced lean concrete may be substituted for upper 1 to 2 inches of base. Compact and screed concrete to a smooth, level surface. C. First Course: Place first course of segmental retaining wall units on leveling base/course for full length of wall. Place units in firm contact with each other, properly aligned and level. Tamp units into leveling base as necessary to bring tops of units into a level plane. D. Subsequent Courses: Remove excess fill and debris from tops of units in course below. Place units in firm contact, properly aligned, and directly on course below. For units with lips at front of units, slide units as far forward as possible for firm contact with lips of units below. 09070 (3/18/11) SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 323223 -4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Level: For bed joint lines along walls, do not exceed 1-114 inches in 20 feet, 3 inches maximum. B. Variation from Indicated Batter: For slope of wall face, do not vary from indicated slope by more than 1-114 inches in 10 feet. C. Variation from Indicated Wall Line: For walls indicated as straight, do not vary from straight line by more than 1-114 inches in 10 feet. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality -control testing. B. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for in-place compaction testing. In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least 1 field in-place compaction test for each 150 feet or less of segmental retaining wall length. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace segmental retaining wall construction of the following description: 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged units. Units may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Segmental retaining walls that do not match approved Samples. 3. Segmental retaining walls that do not comply with other requirements indicated. B. Replace units so segmental retaining wall matches approved Samples and mockups, complies with other requirements, and shows no evidence of replacement. END OF SECTION 32 3223 09070 (3118/11) SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 323223 - 5 i _ ^�- ',-i ( � _ ;I < r CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 32 8400 - PLANTING IRRIGATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Piping. 2. Encasement for piping. 3. Automatic control valves. 4. Transition fittings. 5. Dielectric fittings. b. Miscellaneous piping specialties. 7. Sprinklers. 8. Quick couplers. 9. Drip irrigation specialties. 10. Controllers. 11. Boxes for automatic control valves. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Circuit Piping: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow. B. Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit -piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure. C. Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water -distribution -system pressure. D. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or, for remote -control, signaling power -limited circuits. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Irrigation zone control shall be automatic operation with controller and automatic control valves. 09070 (3/18111) PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400- 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO B. Location of Sprinklers and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards. Maintain 100 percent irrigation coverage of areas indicated. 1. Field verify soil conditions: C. Minimum Working Pressures: The following are minimum pressure requirements for piping, valves, and specialties unless otherwise indicated: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: 200 psig. 2. Circuit Piping: 150 prig. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. C. Record Drawings: I. As installation occurs, prepare accurate record drawing to be submitted before final inspection. Show the following: a. Detail and dimension changes made during construction. b. Significant details and dimensions not shown in original Contract Documents. C. Field dimensioned locations of valve boxes, quick coupler valves, control wire runs not in mainline trench, and both ends of sleeves. d. Take dimensions from permanent constructed surfaces or edges located at or above finished grade. e. Take record dimensions at time of installation. 2. Reduce copy of record drawing to half-size, color key circuits, and laminate both sides with 5 mil thick or heavier plastic. D. Controller Timing Schedule: Indicate timing settings for each automatic controller zone. E. Operation and. Maintenance Data: For sprinklers, controllers, and automatic control valves to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers with 5 years experience, in business a minimum of 5 years. Approved installers: I. Artesian 2. Merrill Quality Landscaping 3. Season's West 09070 (3118111) PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver piping with factory -applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe -end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless pennitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Project Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Project Manager's written permission. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. I . Impact Sprinklers: Two units. 2. Spray Sprinklers: Equal to Two units. 3. Bubblers: Equal to Two units. 4. Emitters: Equal to Two units. 5. Drip -Tube System Tubing: 100 feet. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Comply with requirements in the piping schedule for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. B. Galvanized -Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight, Type E, Grade B. 1. Galvanized -Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Standard Weight, seamless -steel pipe with threaded ends. 2. Galvanized, Gray -Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B 16.4, Class 125, standard pattern. 3. Malleable -Iron Unions: ASME 816.39, Class 150, hexagonal -stock body with ball-and- socket, metal -to -metal, bronze seating surface, and female threaded ends. 09070 (3/18/11) PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 4. Cast -Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125. C. Ductile -Iron Pipe with Mechanical Joints: AWWA C151, with mechanical -joint bell and spigot ends. Mechanical -Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA CI 10, ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact pattern. a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile- or gray -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. D. Ductile -Iron Pipe with Push -on Joint: AWWA 0151, with push -on -joint bell and spigot ends. 1. Push -on -Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray -iron standard pattern or AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact pattern. a. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. E. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASME B 16.22, wrought - copper solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought -copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, cast -copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball-and- socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces and solder joint or threaded ends. F. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, and ASTM B 88, Type M, water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought - copper solder joint fittings. Furnish wrought -copper fittings if indicated. 2. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, cast -copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body, with ball-and- socket, metal -to -metal seating surfaces and solder -joint or threaded ends. G. PE Pipe with Controlled ID: ASTM F 771, PE 3408 compound; SIDR 11.5 and SIDR 15, 1. Insert Fittings for PE Pipe: ASTM D 2609, nylon or propylene plastic with barbed ends. Include bands or other fasteners. H. PE Pipe with Controlled OD: ASTM F 771, PE 3408 compound, SDR 11. 1. PE Butt, Heat -Fusion Fittings: ASTM D 3261. 2. PE Socket -Type Fittings: ASTM D 2683, I. PE Pressure Pipe: AWWA C906, with DR of 7.3, 9, or 9.3 and PE compound number required to give pressure rating not less than 200 psig . 1. PE Butt, Heat -Fusion Fittings: ASTM D 3261. 2. PE Socket -Type Fittings: ASTM D 2683. 3. As shown on drawings. 09070 (3118111) PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO J. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedules 40 and 80. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466, Schedule 80. 2. PVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464, Schedule 80. 3. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP -107, except both headpiece and tailpiece shall be PVC with socket ends. K. PVC Pipe, Pressure Rated: ASTM D 2241, PVC 1120 compound, SDR 21 and SDR 26. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467, Schedule 80. 2. PVC Socket Unions: Construction similar to MSS SP -107, except both headpiece and tailpiece shall be PVC with socket or threaded ends, 2.2 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 118 inch thick unless otherwise indicated; full -face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal, Pipe -Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.81A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper -phosphorus alloys for general - duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E, Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. F. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. B. Form: Tube. C. Material: LLDPE film of 0.008 -inch minimum thickness. D. Color: Black. 2.4 MANUAL VALVES A. Curb Valves: 1. As shown on drawings. 09070 (3118111) PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400-5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO B. Curb -Valve Casing: 1. As shown on drawings. C. Brass Ball Valves: I . Manufacturers: As shown on drawings. D. Plastic Ball Valves: 1. As shown on drawings. 2.5 PRESSURE -REDUCING VALVES A. Water Regulators: 1. Manufacturers: As shown 2.6 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES A. Bronze, Automatic Control Valves: 1. Manufacturers: As shown. 2.7 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. B. Transition Couplings: 1. Manufacturers: As shown. 2.8 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.1. Include 4 -112 -inch diameter dial, dial range of two times system operating pressure, and bottom outlet. 09070 (3/18/11) PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2.10 SPRINKLERS A. General Requirements: Designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated at available water pressure. B. Plastic, Pop-up, Gear -Drive Rotary Sprinklers: 1. Manufacturers: As shown C. Plastic, Pop-up Spray Sprinklers: 1. Manufacturers: As shown D. Plastic Shrub Sprinklers: 1. Manufacturers: As shown. 2.11 QUICK COUPLERS A. Manufacturers: As shown. 2.12 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTIES A. Manufacturers: As shown. B. Off -Ground Supports: Plastic stakes. C. Application Pressure Regulators: Brass or plastic housing, NPS 314, with corrosion -resistant internal parts; capable of controlling outlet pressure to approximately 20 prig. D. Filter Units: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion -resistant internal parts; of size and capacity required for devices downstream from unit. E. Air Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion -resistant internal parts. F. Vacuum Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion -resistant internal parts. 2.13 CONTROLLERS A. Manufacturers: As shown. 2.14 BOXES FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES A. Plastic Boxes: I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following: 09070 (311$!11) PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400- 7 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO a. Ametek. b. Carson Industries LLC. C. Brooks. B. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 314 inch minimurn to 3 inches maximum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." B. Install warning tape directly above pressure piping, 12 inches below finished grades, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavement and slabs. C. Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 314 to 3 inches, to 12 inches below grade. Cover gravel or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt -saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated material. D. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 18 inches 2. Circuit Piping: 12 inches. 3. Drain Piping: 12 inches. 4. Sleeves: 18 inches. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Set stakes to identify locations of proposed irrigation system. Obtain project manager's approval before excavation. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Location and Arrangement: Drawings indicate location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping at minimum uniform slope of 0.5 percent down toward drain valves. C. Install piping free of sags and bends. D. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 09070 (3118/11) PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 9 CENTRAL QUAD BRIG14AM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO F. Install unions adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2 or smaller pipe connection. G. Install flanges adjacent to valves and to final connections to other components with NPS 2-112 or larger pipe connection. H. Install underground thermoplastic piping according to ASTM D 2774. I. Install expansion loops in control -valve boxes for plastic piping. J. Lay piping on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. K. Install ductile -iron piping according to AWWA 0600. L. Install PVC piping in dry weather when temperature is above 40 deg F. Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperatures above 40 deg F before testing. M. Install water regulators with shutoff valve and strainer on inlet and pressure gage on outlet. Install shutoff valve on outlet. Install aboveground or in control -valve boxes. N. Water Hammer Arresters: Install between connection to building main and circuit valves aboveground or in control -valve boxes. O. Install piping in sleeves under parking lots, roadways, and sidewalks. P. Install sleeves made of Schedule 40 PVC pipe and socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. Q. Install transition fittings for plastic -to -metal pipe connections according to industry standards. R. Install dielectric fittings for dissimilar -metal pipe connections according to industry standards. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME 131.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry sea] threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. D. Flanged Joints: Select rubber gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 09070 (3118111) PLANTING IRRIGATION 328400-9 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO E. Ductile -Iron Piping Gasketed Joints: Comply with AWWA 0600 and AWWA M41. F. Copper -Tubing Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using copper -phosphorus brazing filler metal. G. Copper -Tubing Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813 water-flushable flux to tube end unless otherwise indicated. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy (0.20 percent maximum lead content) complying with ASTM B 32, H. PE Piping Fastener Joints: Join with insert fittings and bands or fasteners according to piping manufacturer's written instructions. I. PE Piping Heat -Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain -End PE Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain -End PE Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. J. PVC Piping Solvent -Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number, ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other -than -schedule -number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Underground Curb Valves: Install in curb -valve casings with tops flush with grade. B. Underground Iron Gate Valves, Resilient Seat: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install in valve casing with top flush with grade. Install valves and PVC pipe with restrained, gasketed joints. C. Aboveground Valves: Install as components of connected piping system. D. Pressure -Reducing Valves: Install as shown. 3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install sprinklers after hydrostatic test is completed. B. Install sprinklers at manufacturer's recommended heights. 09070 (3/18/11) PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 10 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNNERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO C. Locate part -circle sprinklers to maintain a minimum distance of 12 inches from walls and 2 inches from other boundaries unless otherwise indicated. 3.7 DRIP IRRIGATION SPECIALTY INSTALLATION A. Install freestanding emitters on pipe riser to mounting height indicated. B. Install manifold emitter systems with tubing to emitters. Plug unused manifold outlets. Install emitters on off -ground supports at height indicated. C. Install multiple -outlet emitter systems with tubing to outlets. Plug unused emitter outlets. Install outlets on off -ground supports at height indicated. D. Install drip tubes with direct -attached emitters on ground. E. Install drip tubes with remote -discharge on ground with outlets on off -ground supports at height indicated. F. Install off -ground supports of length required for indicated mounted height of device. G. Install application pressure regulators and filter units in piping near device being protected, and in control -valve boxes. H. Install air relief valves in piping, and in control -valve boxes. 3.8 AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION -CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Equipment Mounting: Install interior controllers on wall. I. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. B. Equipment Mounting: Install exterior freestanding controllers on precast concrete bases. 1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. C. Install control cable in same trench as irrigation piping and taped to piping. Provide conductors of size not smaller than recommended by controller manufacturer. Install cable in separate sleeve under paved areas. 3.9 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water supply from exterior water service piping, water rncters, 09070 (3118111) PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 11 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO protective enclosures, and backflow preventers. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment, valves, and devices to allow service and maintenance. C. Connect wiring between controllers and automatic control valves. 3.10 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install on control valves. B. Warning Tapes: Arrange for installation of continuous, underground, detectable warning tapes over underground piping during backfilling of trenches. See Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for warning tapes. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate controllers and automatic control valves to confirm proper system operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Any irrigation product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.12 STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that controllers are installed and connected according to the Contract Documents, 3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal. 3.13 ADJUSTING A. Adjust settings of controllers. B. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit. 09070 (3/18111) PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 12 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO C. Adjust sprinklers and devices, except those intended to be mounted aboveground, so they will be 1/2 inch above, finish grade. 3.14 CLEANING A. Flush dirt and debris from piping before installing sprinklers and other devices. 3.15 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic control valves and controller. 3.16 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. B. Piping in control -valve boxes and aboveground may be joined with flanges or unions instead of joints indicated. C. Aboveground irrigation main piping shall be the following: I. Galvanized -steel pipe and galvanized -steel pipe nipples; galvanized, gray -iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. D. Underground irrigation main piping shall be as shown on drawings. E. Circuit piping shall be as shown on drawings. F. Underground Branches and Offsets at Sprinklers and Devices: As shown. G. Risers to Aboveground Sprinklers and Specialties: As shown on drawings. H. Risers to Aboveground Sprinklers and Specialties: As shown 3.17 VALVE SCHEDULE A. As shown on drawings. END OF SECTION 32 8400 09070 (3118111) PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 8400 - 13 CENTRAL QUAD BRIG1 AM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO SECTION 32 9200 - TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Seeding. 2. Hydroseeding. 3. Sodding. 4. Meadow grasses and wildflowers. 5. Turf renovation. 6. Erosion -control materials. 7. Grass paving. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough grading. 3. Division 32 Section "Porous Unit Paving" for concrete grid -type pavers shaped to provide open areas between units, planted with grass or other plants. 4. Division 32 Section "Planting Irrigation" for turf irrigation. 5. Division 32 Section "Plants" for border edgings. 6. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for subsurface drainage. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus. B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and 09070 (3118111) TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the Lack of organic matter and soil organisms. I. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to this Project. B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass -seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier. C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. D. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer. E. Material Test Reports: For imported or manufactured topsoil. F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf and meadows during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods. 09070 (3/18/11) TURF AND GRASSES 329200-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful turf and meadow establishment. 1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association. 2. Experience: Five years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 4. Certification program in first subparagraph below is administered by the Professional Landcare Network. See Evaluations. 5. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. 6. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. B. Soil -Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed. C. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil -testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; [sodium absorption ratio; ]deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant -nutrient content of the soil. 1. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook No. 60. 2. The soil -testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling, with depth, location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from Project manager. A minimum of two representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes. 3. Report suitability of tested soil for turf growth. a. Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. or volume per cu. yd. for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. 09070 (3118/11) TURF AND GRASSES 329200-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable. B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod in time for planting within 24 hours of harvesting. Protect sod from breakage and drying. C. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil -bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, and soil amendments with appropriate certificates. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Planting Restrictions: Plant at time approved by project manager. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable turf is established but for not less than the following periods: Seeded Turf: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion. a. When initial maintenance period has not elapsed before end of planting season, or if turf is not fully established, continue maintenance during next planting season. 2. Sodded Turf. 30 days from date of substantial completion. B. Initial Meadow Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after each area is planted and continue until acceptable meadow is established, but for not less than 30 days from date of substantial completion. 09070 (3118111) TURF AND GRASSES 329200-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SEED A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new -crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology; Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances. B. Seed Species: State -certified seed of grass species as shown on drawings: C. Grass Seed Mix: Proprietary seed mix as shown on drawings. 2.2 TURFGRASS SOD A. Obtain sod from Alpha Sod, Rexburg, Idaho (208) 351-1212. B. Turfgrass Sod: Certified, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture, strongly rooted, and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted. C. Turfgrass Species: poa pratensis, Kentucky Bluegrass 2.3 MEADOW GRASSES AND WILDFLOWERS A. Wildflower Seed: Fresh, clean, and dry new seed, of mixed species as shown on drawings. B. Native Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, and dry new seed, of mixed species shown on drawings. C. Seed Carrier: Inert material, sharp clean sand or perlite, mixed with seed at a ratio of not less than two parts seed carrier to one part seed. 2.4 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well -composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1 -inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Compost shall be Biorem true compost organic compost, (208) 881-3281, Ecobark Compost, (208) 359-7509, or equal. 09070 (3/18/11) TURF AND GRASSES 329200-5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2.5 FERTILIZERS A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid. B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial -grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: 1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: 16-16-16-5. 2.6 PLANTING SOILS A. Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content; free of stones I inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix ASTM D 5268 topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: I . By volume: a. Three parts topsoil b. One part compost 2. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 sq. ft. surface area: 10 lbs. 2.7 MULCHES A. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed -wood, cellulose -fiber mulch; nontoxic and free of plant - growth or gennination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5. B. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber -mulch manufacturer for slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant -growth or germination inhibitors. 2.8 PESTICIDES A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Pre -Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non -Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer. C. Post -Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non -Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already genninated. 09070 (3/18/11) TURF AND GRASSES 329200-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2.9 EROSION -CONTROL MATERIALS A. Erosion -Control Blankets: Biodegradable wood excelsior, straw, or coconut -fiber mat enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long. B. Erosion -Control Fiber Mesh: Biodegradable burlap or spun -coir mesh, a minimum of 0.92 lb/sq. yd., with 50 to 65 percent open area. Include manufacturer's recommended steel wire staples, 6 inches long. C. Erosion -Control Mats: Cellular, non -biodegradable slope -stabilization mats designed to isolate and contain small areas of soil over steeply sloped surface, of 3 -inch nominal mat thickness. Include manufacturer's recommended anchorage system for slope conditions. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Invisible Structures, Inc.; Slopetame 2. b. Presto Products Company, a business of Alcoa; Geoweb. C. Tenax Corporation - USA; Tenweb. 2.10 GRASS -PAVING MATERIALS A. Grass Paving: Cellular, non -biodegradable plastic mats, designed to contain small areas of soil and enhance the ability of turf to support vehicular and pedestrian traffic, as shown on drawings. B. Buse Course: Sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8. C. Sand: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate. D. Proprietary Growing Mix: As submitted and acceptable to Project manager. E. Sandy Loam Soil Mix: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33 for fine aggregate blended with planting soil as specified. Use blend consisting of 1/2 sand and 1/2 planting soil. F. Soil for Paving Fill: Planting soil as specified. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 09070 (3/18/11) TURF AND GRASSES 329200-7 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Project manager and replace with new planting soil. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings frorn damage caused by planting operations. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydroseeding and hydromulching overspray. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them. B. Install erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. 3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION A. Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted. B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. Spread topsoil to a depth of 12", apply soil amendments and fertilizer on surface, and thoroughly blend into top 4" of topsoil. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within a few days. b. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod. C. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface -soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows: 1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil. 2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and fertilizers according to planting soil mix proportions and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of soil. Till soil to a homogeneous mixture of fine texture. 09070 (3/18/11) TURF AND GRASSES 329200-8 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO a. Apply fertilizer directly to surface soil before loosening. 3. Remove stones larger than I inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter. 4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property. D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, unifonnly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fall depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. E. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. F. Before planting, obtain Project manager's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.4 PREPARATION FOR EROSION -CONTROL MATERIALS A. Prepare area as specified in "Turf Area Preparation" Article. B. For erosion -control mats, install planting soil in two lifts, with second lift equal to thickness of erosion -control mats. Install erosion -control mat and fasten as recommended by material manufacturer. C. Fill cells of erosion -control mat with planting soil and compact before planting. D. For erosion -control blanket or mesh, install from top of slope, working downward, and as recommended by material manufacturer for site conditions. Fasten as recommended by material manufacturer. E. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. 3.5 PREPARATION FOR GRASS -PAVING MATERIALS A. Reduce subgrade elevation soil to allow for thickness of grass -paving system. Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade so that installed paving is within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions. B. Install base course, and course and soil for paving fill as recommended by paving -material manufacturer for site conditions; comply with details shown on Drawings. Compact according to paving -material manufacturer's written instructions. C. Install paving mat and fasten according to paving -material manufacturer's written instructions. 09070 (3/18/11) TURF AND GRASSES 329200-9 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO D. Before planting, fill cells of paving mat with planting soil and compact according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Moisten prepared area before planting if surface is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. 3,6 SEEDING A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. 2. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer. B. Sow seed at a total rate of 3 lb/1000 sq. ft. C. Rake seed lightly into top 118 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. D. Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:3 with erosion -control blankets installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Protect seeded areas with erosion -control mats where shown on Drawings; install and anchor according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre to form a continuous blanket 1-112 inches in loose thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment. 1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment. 2. Bond straw mulch by spraying with asphalt emulsion at a rate of 10 to 13 gal./1000 sq. ft. Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of structures or other plantings adjacent to mulched areas. Immediately clean damaged or stained areas. G. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying peat mulch within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of 3/16 inch, and roll surface smooth. 3.7 HYDROSEEDING A. Hydroseeding: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydroseed application, Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application. 1. Mix slurry with fiber -mulch manufacturer's recommended tackifier. 09070 (3/18/11) TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 10 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY -- IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2. Apply slurry uniformly to all areas to be seeded in a one-step process. Apply slurry at a rate so that mulch component is deposited at not less than 1500-lb/acre dry weight, and seed component is deposited at not less than the specified seed -sowing rate. 3.8 SODDING A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if donnant or if ground is frozen or muddy. B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to subgrade or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with subgrade, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass. 1. Lay sod across angle of slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with wood pegs spaced as recommended by sod manufacturer but not less than 2 anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage. C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-112 inches below sod. 3.9 TURF RENOVATION A. Renovate existing turf. B. Renovate existing turf damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles. 1. Reestablish turf where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is required. 2. Install new planting soil as required. C. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory turf areas; do not bury in soil. D. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials such as oil drippings, fuel spills, stones, gravel, and other construction materials resulting from Contractor's operations, and replace with new planting soil. E. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing turf. F. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do not use pre -emergence herbicides. G. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 09070 (3118111) TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 11 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO H. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new turf and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of existing soil. Install new planting soil to fill low spots and mect finish grades. J. Apply sod as required for new turf. K. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established. 3.10 TURK' MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. 1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. 3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf -watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches. 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate. C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 113 of grass height. Remove no more than 113 of grass -leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay snowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height: Mow to a height of 2 inches. D. Turf Postfertilization: Apply fertilizer after initial mowing and when grass is dry. Use fertilizer that will provide actual nitrogen of at least 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. to turf area. 09070 (3118111) TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 12 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 3.11 SATISFACTORY TURF A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Project manager: 1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. and bare spots not exceeding 3 by 3 inches . 2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well -rooted, even - colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities. 3. Satisfactory Plugged Turf: At end of maintenance period, the required number of plugs has been established as well -rooted, viable patches of grass, and areas between plugs are free of weeds and other undesirable vegetation. 4. Satisfactory Sprigged Turf: At end of maintenance period, the required number of sprigs has been established as well -rooted, viable plants, and areas between sprigs are free of weeds and other undesirable vegetation. B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory. 3.12 MEADOW A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other. 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. B. Sow seed at a total rate of 6 oz./1000 sq. ft. C. Brush seed into top 1/16 inch of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray. D. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying peat mulch within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of 3116 inch, and roll surface smooth. E. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until meadow is established. 3.13 MEADOW MAINTENANCE A. Maintain and establish meadow by watering, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish a healthy, viable meadow. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and meadow damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. 09070 (3/18/11) TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 13 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement. 3. Apply treatments as required to keep meadow and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and meadow -watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep meadow uniformly moist. 1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas. 2. Water meadow with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1/2 inch per week for four weeks after planting unless rainfall precipitation is adequate. 3.14 PESTICIDE APPLICATION A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. B. Post -Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non -Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already -germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.15 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas. B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established. C. Remove nondegradable erosion -control measures after grass establishment period. END OF SECTION 32 9200 09070 (3/18111) TURF AND GRASSES 32 9200 - 14 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SECTION 32 9300 - PLANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plants. 2. Planting soils. 3. Tree stabilization. 4. Landscape edgings. 5. Tree grates. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" for protecting, trimming, pruning, repairing, and replacing existing trees to remain that interfere with, or are affected by, execution of the Work. 2. Division 12 Section "Interior Planters and Artificial Plants" for live and artificial interior plants and planters. 3. Division 12 Section "Site Furnishings" for exterior unit planters. 4. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for protection of existing trees and plantings, topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing. 5. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials. 6. Division 32 Section "Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn) and meadow planting, hydroseeding, and erosion -control materials. 7. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for below -grade drainage of landscaped areas, paved areas, and wall perimeters. 1.3 ALLOWANCES A. Allowances for plants are specified in Division 01 Section "Allowances", if any. 1. Perform planting work under quantity allowances and only as authorized. Authorized work includes work required by Drawings and the Specifications and work authorized in writing by Project manager. 2. Notify Project manager weekly of extent of work perfonned that is attributable to quantity allowances. 09070 (3/18/11) PLANTS 32 9300 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO Perform work that exceeds quantity allowances only as authorized by Change Orders. 1.4 UNIT PRICES A, Work of this Section is affected by unit prices specified in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices", if any. Unit prices apply to authorized work covered by quantity allowances. Unit prices apply to additions to and deletions from Work as authorized by Change Orders. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with bail size not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI 260.1 for type and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1. C. Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. D. Bare -Root Stock: Plants with a well -branched, fibrous -root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than minimum root spread according to ANSI 260.1 for type and size of plant required. E. Container -Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well -rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. F. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus. G. Fabric Bag -Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well -rooted plants established and grown in - ground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of fabric bag. Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant. H. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. L Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant. 09070 (3/18111) PLANTS 329300-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO R.EXBURG IDAHO Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses. K. Planting Area: Areas to be planted. L. Planting Soil: Imported topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and fertilizers to produce a soil mixture for backfill. M. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation. N. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk. O. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface. P. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.. Q. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. R. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils. 1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials. 2. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to the Project. 3. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital format of each required species and size of plant material as it will be furnished to the Project. Take photographs from an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of three photographs showing the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery. B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 1, Mulch: 1 -pint volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup. 09070 (3118111) PLANTS 329300-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2. Edging Materials and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size, to verify color selected. 3. Tree Grates and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard size delivered to the site for review, to verify design and color selected. 4. Root Barrier, if specified: Width of panel by 12 inches. C. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons. D. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, from manufacturer, and complying with the following: 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis of standard products. 2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable. E. Material Test Reports: For imported or manufactured topsoil. F. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Submit before start of required maintenance periods. G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants. 1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association. 2. Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 4. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. B. Soil -Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent or university laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be perfonned. C. Soil Analysis: For each unamended soil type, furnish soil analysis and a written report by a qualified soil -testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content; cation exchange capacity; sodium absorption ratio; deleterious material; pH; and mineral and plant -nutrient content of the soil. Testing methods and written recommendations shall comply with USDA's Handbook No. 60. 09070 (3/18/11) PLANTS 329300-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO The soil -testing laboratory shall oversee soil sampling, with depth, location, and number of samples to be taken per instructions from Project manager. A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for planting purposes. Report suitability of tested soil for plant growth. a. Based upon the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated. State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. or volume per cu. yd. for nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants. b. Report presence of problem salts, minerals, or heavy metals, including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action. D. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI 260.1. Selection of plants purchased under allowances will be made by Project manager, who will tag plants at their place of growth before they are prepared for transplanting. E. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. I. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field -grown stock and container grown stock. Measure amain body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above the root flare for trees up to 4 -inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root flare for larger sizes. 2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position. F. Plant Material Observation: Project manager may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Project manager retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. Notify Project manager of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site. G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws if applicable. 09070 (3118111) PLANTS 32 9300 - 5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO B. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil -bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers, and soil amendments with appropriate certificates. C. Deliver bare -root stock plants freshly dug. Immediately after digging up bare -root stock, pack root system in wet straw, hay, or other suitable material to keep root system moist until planting. D. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind -tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling. E. Handle planting stock by root ball. F. Store bulbs, corms, and tubers in a dry place at 60 to 65 deg F until planting. G. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Heel -in bare -root stock. Soak roots that are in dry condition in water for two hours. Reject dried -out plants. 2. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. 3. Do not remove container -grown stock from containers before time of planting. 4. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine -mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly -wet condition. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work. B. Interruption of Existing Services or Utilities: Do not interrupt services or utilities to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary services or utilities according to requirements indicated: 09070 (3118111) PLANTS 329300-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 1. Notify Project Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of each service or utility. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of services or utilities without Project Manager's written permission. C. Planting Restrictions: Plant at times directed by Project Manager. Coordinate planting periods with maintenance periods to provide required maintenance from date of Substantial Completion, D. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be perfonned when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. E. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. C. Faulty performance. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Periods from Date of Substantial Completion: a. Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Ornamental Grasses: 12 months. b. Ground Covers, Biennials, Perennials, and Other Plants: 12 months. C. Annuals: Two months. 3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum: a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period. C. A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. 09070 (3118/11) PLANTS 329300-7 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant material. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. Maintenance Period: Two months from date of Substantial Completion. B. Initial Maintenance Service for Ground Cover and Other Plants: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. Maintenance Period: Two months from date of Substantial Completion. C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANT MATERIAL A. Obtain plant material from R&D Wholesale, Idaho Falls, Idaho (208) 521-7768 B. General: Furnish nursery -grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well -shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots will be rejected. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI 260.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Project manager, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. 09070 (3/18/11) PLANTS 329300-8 CENTRAL, QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO D. Root -Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. E. Labeling: Label each plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common narne and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant as shown on Drawings. F. If formal arrangements or consecutive order of plants is shown on Drawings, select stock for uniform height and spread, and number the labels to assure symmetry in planting. G. Annuals: Provide healthy, disease-free plants of species and variety shown or Iisted, with well- established root systems reaching to sides of the container to maintain a firm ball, but not with excessive root growth encircling the container. Provide only plants that are acclimated to outdoor conditions before delivery. 2.2 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade. 2.3 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well -composted, stable, and weed -free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1 -inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Compost shall be Biorem true compost organic compost, (208) 881-3281, Ecobark Compost, (208) 359-7509, or equal. 2.4 FERTILIZERS A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial -grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition: I. Composition: 1 Ib/1000 sq. ft. of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight. 2. Composition: 16-16-16-5 B. Planting Tablets: Tightly compressed chip type, long-lasting, slow-release, commercial -grade planting fertilizer in tablet form. Tablets shall break down with soil bacteria, converting nutrients into a form that can be absorbed by plant roots. Size: 21 -gram tablets. 09070 (3/18/11) PLANTS 329300-9 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2. Nutrient Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 5 percent potassium, by weight plus micronutrients. C. Chelated Iron: Commercial -grade FeEDDHA for dicots and woody plants, and commercial - grade FeDTPA for ornamental grasses and monocots. 2.5 PLANTING SOILS A. Planting Soil: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, with pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 4 percent organic material content; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. Mix ASTM D 5268 topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce planting soil: 1. By volume: a. Four parts topsoil b. One part compost C. One part perlite 2. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 sq. ft. surface area: 10 lbs. 2.6 MULCHES A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following: Type: Fiber-rnulch Shredded Fir Bark. B. Mineral Mulch: Hard, durable stone, washed free of loam, sand, clay, and other foreign substances, of following type, size range, and color: 1. As shown on drawings. 2.7 WEED -CONTROL BARRIERS A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum, composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position. Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally -encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids. 2.8 PESTICIDES A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. 09070 (3118111) PLANTS 32 9300 - 10 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO B. Pre -Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non -Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer. C. Post -Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non -Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated. 2.9 TREE STABILIZATION MATERIALS A. Stakes and Guys: 1, Upright and Guy Stakes: Rough -sawn, sound, new softwood with specified wood pressure -preservative treatment, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2 round by length indicated, pointed at one end. 2, Wood Deadmen: Timbers measuring 8 inches in diameter and 48 inches long, treated with specified wood pressure -preservative treatment. 3. Flexible Ties: Wide rubber or elastic bands or straps of length required to reach stakes. 4. Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized -steel wire, two -strand, twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter. 5. Tree -Tie Webbing: UV -resistant polypropylene or nylon webbing with brass grommets. 6. Guy Cables: Five -strand, 3/16 -inch- (4.8 -mm-) diameter, galvanized -steel cable, with zinc -coated turnbuckles or compression springs, a minimum of 3 inches long, with two 3/8 -inch galvanized eyebolts. 7. Flags: Standard surveyor's plastic flagging tape, white, 6 inches long. 2.10 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS A. Not used. 2.11 TREE GRATES A. As shown on drawings. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Wood Pressure -Preservative Treatment if shown on drawings: AWPA C2, with waterborne preservative for soil and freshwater use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and containing no arsenic; including ammoniacal copper arsenate, ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate, and chromated copper arsenate. B. Root Barrier if shown on drawings: Black, molded, modular panels manufactured with 50 percent recycled polyethylene plastic with ultraviolet inhibitors, 85 mils thick, with vertical root deflecting ribs protruding 3/4 inch out from panel, and each panel 24 inches wide. 09070 (3118/11) PLANTS 32 9300 - 11 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO C. Antidesiccant: Water -insoluble emulsion, penneable moisture retarder, film fonning, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Burlap: Non -synthetic, biodegradable. E. Planter Drainage Gravel, where shown on drawings: Washed, sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8. F. Planter Filter Fabric, where shown: Woven geotextile manufactured for separation applications and made of polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fibers or combination of them, PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty, B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Project manager and replace with new planting soil. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations. B. Install erosion -control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil -bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Project manager's acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required. 09070 (3118111) PLANTS 32 9300 - 12 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO D. Lay out plants at locations directed by Project Manager. Stake locations of individual trees and shrubs and outline areas for multiple plantings. E. Apply antidesiccant to trees and shrubs using power spray to provide an adequate film over trunks (before wrapping), branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect during digging, handling, and transportation. If deciduous trees or shrubs are moved in full leaf, spray with antidesiccant at nursery before moving and again two weeks after planting. F. Wrap trees and shrubs with burlap fabric over trunks, branches, stems, twigs, and foliage to protect from wind and other damage during digging, handling, and transportation. 3.3 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. 1. Apply superphosphate fertilizer directly to subgrade before loosening. 2. Spread topsoil to a depth of 12" B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. C. Before planting, obtain Project manager's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. 3.4 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45 - degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for balled and burlapped or container -grown stock. 2. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball. 3. If area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling. 4. Maintain required angles of repose of adjacent materials as shown on the Drawings. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures, hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements. 5. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. 6. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected after working hours or when unattended by Installer's personnel. 09070 (3/18111) PLANTS 32 9300 - 13 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO If drain tile is shown on Drawings or required under planting areas, excavate to top of porous backfill over tile. B. Subsoil and topsoil removed from excavations may not be used as planting soil. C. Obstructions: Notify Project manager if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations. D. Drainage: Notify Project manager if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits. E. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs. 3.5 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PLANTING A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI 260.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top -most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements. B. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. C. Set balled and burlapped stock plumb and in center of planting pit or trench with root flare 1 inch (25 mm) above adjacent finish grades. I . Use planting soil for backfill. 2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation. 3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. 4. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil -testing laboratory. Place tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole. 5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil. D. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball. 3.6 MECHANIZED TREE SPADE PLANTING A. Trees may be planted with an approved mechanized tree spade at the designated locations. Do not use tree spade to move trees larger than the maximum size allowed for a similar field - grown, balled-and-burlapped root -ball diameter according to ANSI Z60.1, or larger than the 09070 (3/18/11) PLANTS 329300-14 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO manufacturer's maximum size recommendation for the tree spade being used, whichever is smaller. B. When extracting the tree, center the trunk within the tree spade and move tree with a solid ball of earth. C. Cut exposed roots cleanly during transplanting operations. D. Use the same tree spade to excavate the planting hole as was used to extract and transport the tree. E. Plant trees as shown on Drawings, following procedures in "Tree, Shrub, and Vine Planting" Article. F. Where possible, orient the tree in the same direction as in its original location. 3.7 TREE, SHRUB, AND VINE PRUNING A. Remove only dead, dying, or broken branches. Do not prune for shape. B. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines as directed by Project manager. C. Prune, thin, and shape trees, shrubs, and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Project manager, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character. D. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds. 3.8 TREE STABILIZATION A. Install trunk stabilization as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2 inch caliper. Stake trees of less than 2 -inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend to one-third of trunk height above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. 2. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. B. Staking and Guying: Stake and guy trees more than 14 feet in height and more than 3 inches in caliper unless otherwise indicated. Securely attach no fewer than three guys to stakes 30 inches long, driven to grade. Site -Fabricated Staking -and -Guying Method: 09070 (3118111) PLANTS 32 9300 - 15 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY -- IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO a. For trees more than 6 inches in caliper, anchor guys to wood deadmen buried at least 36 inches below grade. Provide turnbuckle or compression spring for each guy wire and tighten securely. b. Support trees with bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk and reaching to turnbuckle or compression spring. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. C. Attach flags to each guy wire, 30 inches above finish grade. d. Paint turnbuckles or compression springs with luminescent white paint. Proprietary Staking and Guying Device: Install staking and guying system sized and positioned as recommended by manufacturer unless otherwise indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Root -Ball Stabilization if called for on drawings: Install at, or below -grade stabilization system to secure each new planting by the root ball unless otherwise indicated. Wood Hold -Down Method: Place vertical stakes against side of root ball and drive them into subsoil; place horizontal wood hold-down stake across top of root ball and screw at each end to one of the vertical stakes. a. Install stakes of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation. Saw stakes off at horizontal stake. b. Install screws through horizontal hold-down and penetrating at least 1 inch into stakes. Predrill holes if necessary to prevent splitting wood. C. Install second set of stakes on other side of root trunk for larger trees as indicated. 3.9 ROOT -BARRIER INSTALLATION Install root barrier where trees are planted within 60 inches of paving or other hardscape elements, such as walls, curbs, and walkways where shown on Drawings. Install per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.10 PLANTING IN PLANTERS A. Place a layer of drainage gravel at least 4 inches thick in bottom of planter. Cover bottom with filter fabric and wrap filter fabric 4 inches up on all sides. Duct tape along the entire top edge of the filter fabric, to secure the filter fabric against the sides during the soil -filling process. B. Fill planter with lightweight on -structure planting soil. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to an elevation of 1-112 inches below top of planter, allowing natural settlement. 3.11 GROUND COVER AND PLANT PLANTING A. Set out and space ground cover and plants other than trees, shrubs, and vines as indicated in even rows with triangular spacing. B. Use planting soil for backfill. 09070 (3118111) PLANTS 32 9300 - 16 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY e IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO C. Dig holes large enough to allow spreading of roots. D. For rooted cutting plants supplied in flats, plant each in a manner that will minimally disturb the root system but to a depth not less than two nodes. E. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. F. Water thoroughly after planting, taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. G. Protect plants from hot sun and wind; remove protection if plants show evidence of recovery from transplanting shock. 3.12 PLANTING AREA MULCHING A. Install weed -control barriers before mulching according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, if shown on drawings, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches and secure seams with galvanized pins. B. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated. 1. Trees and Tree -like Shrubs in Turf Areas: Apply [organic] [mineral] mulch ring of 3 - inch average thickness, within 36 -inch radius around trunks or stems. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems. 2. Organic Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3 -inch average thickness of organic mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems. 3. Mineral Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 3 -inch average thickness of mineral mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems. 3.13 EDGING INSTALLATION A. Steel Edging: Install steel edging where indicated. Weld joints. 3.14 TREE GRATE INSTALLATION A. Tree Grates: Set grate segments flush with adjoining surfaces as shown on Drawings. Shim from supporting substrate with soil -resistant plastic. Maintain a 3 inch minimum growth radius around base of tree; break away units of casting, if necessary, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.15 PLANT MAINTENANCE A. Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree -stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or 09070 (3118111) PLANTS 32 9300 - 17 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. B. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence. C. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated past management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents. 3.16 PESTICIDE APPLICATION A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed. B. Pre -Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non -Selective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground - cover areas in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas. C. Post -Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non -Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already -germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.17 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings. C. After installation and before Substantial Completion, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site. 3.18 DISPOSAL A. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 32 9300 09070 (3118111) PLANTS 32 9300 - 18 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNNERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO SECTION 33 4100 - STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING PART l - GENERAL 1.2 1.3 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY A. This Section includes gravity -flow, nonpressure storm drainage outside the building, with the following components: A. I . Special fittings for expansion and deflection. 2. Backwater valves. 3. Cleanouts. 4. Drains. 5. Trench drains 6. Corrosion -protection piping encasement. 7. Precast concrete manholes. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Gravity -Flow, Nonpressure, Drainage -Piping Pressure Rating: 10 -foot head of water or equivalent Pipe joints shall be at least silttight, unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Trench drain grates. 2. Special pipe fittings. 3. Backwater valves. 4. Drains. 5. Channel drainage systems. 6. Storage and leaching chambers. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Manholes: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers 2. Catch Basins and Stormwater Inlets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames, covers, and grates. 3. Stormwater Detention Structures: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, frames and covers, design calculations, and concrete design -mix report. 09070 (3/18/11) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100 - 1 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO C. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from storm drainage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures. D. Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles at horizontal scale of not less than 1 inch equals 50 feet and vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate manholes and piping. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing system piping. E. Field quality -control test reports. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. D. Handle catch basins and stormwater inlets according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Storm Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Owner's written pennission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 09070 (3118111) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100-2 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Pressure Pipe:. AWWA 0900, Class 150 for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. I. Fittings NPS 4 to NPS 8: PVC pressure fittings complying with AWWA 0907, for gasketed joints and using ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals. 2. Fittings NPS 10 and Larger: Ductile -iron, compact fittings complying with AWWA C153, for push -on joints and using AWWA C111, rubber gaskets. 2.4 NONPRESSURE -TYPE PIPE COUPLINGS A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. B. Sleeve Materials: 1. For Concrete Pipes: ASTM C 443, rubber. 2. For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 3. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 4. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. C. Unshielded Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric sleeve with stainless-steel shear ring and corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. Manufacturers: a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. b. Fernco Inc. C. Logan Clay Products Company (The). d. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. e. NDS Inc. f. Plastic Oddities, Inc. D. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrasion -resistant outer shield and corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. 09070 (3118111) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-3 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO b. Dallas Specialty &. Mfg. Co. C. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. E. Ring -Type Flexible Couplings: Elastomeric compression seal with dimensions to fit inside bell of larger pipe and for spigot of smaller pipe to fit inside ring. Manufacturers: a. Femco Inc. b. Logan Clay Products Company (The). C. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. F. Nonpressure -Type Rigid Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve -type reducing- or transition -type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. Manufacturers: a. ANACO. 2.5 DRAINS A. Gray -Iron Area Drains: ASME A112.21.1M, round body with anchor flange and round secured grate. Include bottom outlet with inside calk or spigot connection, of sizes indicated. Manufacturers: a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB Manufacturing, Inc. C. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. d. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. C. Watts Industries, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Zurn Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Top -Loading Classification(s): Heavy duty. B. Gray -Iron Trench Drains: ASME A112.21.1M, 6 -inch- wide top surface, rectangular body with anchor flange or other anchoring device, and rectangular secured grate. Include units of total length indicated and number of bottom outlets with inside calk or spigot connections, of sizes indicated. Manufacturers: a. Josarn Company. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. C. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. d. Watts Industries, Inc. 09070 (3118/11) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-4 CENTRAL QUAD BRJGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Enpoco, Inc. Div. f. turn Industries, Inc.; Zurn Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Top -Loading Classifieation(s): Extra -heavy duty. C. Steel Trench Drains: Factory fabricated from ASTM A 242/A 242M, welded steel plate to form rectangular body with uniform bottom slope of 2 percent down toward outlet, anchor flange, and grate. Include units of total length indicated, bottom outlet of size indicated, outlet strainer, acid -resistant enamel coating on inside and outside surfaces, and grate with openings of total free area at least two times cross-sectional area of outlet. Manufacturers: a. Rockford Sanitary Systems, Inc. 2. Plate Thickness(es): 114 inch. 3. Overall Width(s): 12-113 inches. a. Grate Openings: 3/8 inch circular or 3/8 -by -3 -inch slots. 2.6 Trench Drain Grates: A. Product Oblio 5" as provided by Iron Age Design. 1. Material: Cast iron with standard raw finish. 2. Dimensions: 4.9 inches wide by 19.69 inches long by 14 inch thick. 3. Free drain area: 23 percent. 4. Recycled content: 80 percent. 2.7 MANHOLES A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1. Diameter: 48 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section, as required to prevent flotation. 3. Base Section: 6 -inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4 -inch minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 4. Riser Sections: 4 -inch minimum thickness, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 5. Top Section: Eccentric -cone type unless concentric -cove or flat -slab -top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 6. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber. 7. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe connection. 8. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on l step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps 09070 (3/18/11) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-5 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNNERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 60 inches 9. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 10. Grade Rings: Reinforced -concrete rings, 6- to 9 -inch total thickness, to match diameter of manhole frame and cover. 11. Protective Coating: Plant -applied, SSPC-Paint 16, coal -tar, epoxy-polyamide paint 15 - mil minimum thickness applied to exterior surfaces. 12. Manhole Frames and Covers: Ferrous; 24 -inch ID by 7- to 9 -inch riser with 4 -inch - minimum width flange and 26 -inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "STORM SEWER." a. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile iron, unless otherwise indicated. b. Protective Coating: Foundry -applied, SSPC-Faint 16, coal -tar, epoxy-polyamide paint; 15 -mil minimum thickness applied to all surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2.8 CONCRETE A. General: Cast -in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R, ACI 350R, and the following: 1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II, 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable. B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious materials ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2, Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel. C, Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water- cementiti ous materials ratio. 1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed steel. 2.9 POLYMER -CONCRETE, CHANNEL DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Description, General: Modular system of precast, polymer -concrete channel sections, grates, and appurtenances; designed so grates fit into channel recesses without rocking or rattling. Include number of units required to form total lengths indicated. B. Manufacturers: 1. ABT, Inc. 2, ACO Polymer Products, Inc. 09070 (3/18/11) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100-6 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 3. Innovative Plastics Products. Inc. 4. Mea-Josam Div.; Josam Company. 5. Strongwell; Lenoir City Div. C. Sloped -Invert, Polymer -Concrete Systems: Include the following components: Channel Sections: Interlocking -joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 4 - inch inside width and deep, rounded bottom, with built-in invert slope of 0.6 percent and with outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated. Include extension sections necessary for required depth. a. Frame: Include gray -iron or steel frame for grate. 2. Grates with manufacturer's designation "Heavy Duty," with slots or perforations that fit recesses in channels. a. Material: Galvanized steel. 3. Covers: Solid gray iron, if indicated. 4. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections. D. Narrow -Width, Level -Invert, Polymer -Concrete Systems: Include the following components: 1. Channel Sections: Interlocking joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include 5 - inch inside width and 9 -314 -inch- deep, rounded bottom, with level invert and with NPS 4 outlets in number and locations indicated. 2. Grates with slots or perforations that fit recesses in channels. a. Material: Galvanized steel 3. Covers: Solid gray iron, if indicated. 4. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections. E. Wide -Width, Level -Invert, Polymer -Concrete Systems: Include the following components: 1. Channel Sections: Interlocking -joint, precast, modular units with end caps. Include fl- inch inside width and 13 -314 -inch- deep, rounded bottom, with level invert and with outlets in number, sizes, and locations indicated. 2. Grates with slots or other openings that fit recesses in channels. a. Material: Fiberglass. 3. Covers: Sotid gray iron, if indicated. 4. Locking Mechanism: Manufacturer's standard device for securing grates to channel sections. F. Supports, Anchors, and Setting Devices: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated. 09070 (3118111) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100-7 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO G 2.10 A. Channel -Section Joining and Fastening Materials: As recommended by system manufacturer. CATCH BASINS Standard Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints. 1. Base Section: 6 -inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4 -inch minimum thickness for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor. 2. Riser Sections: 4 -inch mini►num thickness, 48 -inch diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated. 3. Top Section: Eccentric -cone type unless concentric -cone or flat -slab -top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 4. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber. 5. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking rings with level or sloped edge in thickness and shape matching catch basin frame and grate. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer. 6. Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced -concrete rings, of 6- to 9 -inch total thickness, that match 24 -inch- diameter frame and grate. 7. Steps: Individual FRA steps or FRP ladder wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on 1 step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of catch basin to finished grade is less than 60 inches. 8. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section. STORMWATER INLETS Curb Inlets: Made with vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards. Gutter Inlets: Made with horizontal gutter opening, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates. Combination Inlets: Made with vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and dimensions according to utility standards. Include heavy-duty frames and grates. Frames and Grates: Heavy-duty frames and grates according to utility standards. Curb Inlets: Vertical curb opening, of materials and dimensions indicated. Gutter Inlets: Horizontal gutter opening, of materials and dimensions indicated. Include heavy- duty frames and grates. G. Combination Inlets: Vertical curb and horizontal gutter openings, of materials and dimensions indicated. Include heavy-duty frames and grates. 09070 (3/18/11) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-8 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO H. Frames and Grates: Dimensions, opening pattern, free area, and other attributes indicated. 2.12 STORMWATER DETENTION STRUCTURES A. Cast -in -Place Concrete, Stormwater Detention Structures: Construct of reinforced -concrete bottom, walls, and top; designed according to ASTM C 890 for A-16 (ASSHTO HS20-44), heavy -traffic, structural loading; of depth, shape, dimensions, and appurtenances indicated. 1. Ballast: Increase thickness of concrete, as required to prevent flotation. 2. Grade Rings: Include 2 or 3 reinforced -concrete rings, of 6- to 9 -inch total thickness, that match 24 -inch- diameter frame and cover. 3. Steps: Individual FRP steps or FRP ladder, wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on I step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off of step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12- to 16 -inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of structure to finished grade is less than 60 inches . B. Manhole Frames and Covers: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile -iron castings designed for heavy-duty service. Include 24 -inch ID by 7- to 9 -inch riser with 4 -inch minimum width flange, and 26 -inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering "STORM SEWER" cast into cover. 2.13 PIPE OUTLETS A. Head Walls: Cast -in-place reinforced concrete, with apron and tapered sides. B. Riprap Basins: Broken, irregular size and shape, graded stone according to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control." 1. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-3, screen opening 2 inches. 2. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-4, screen opening 3 inches. 3. Average Size: NSSGA No. R-5, screen opening 5 inches. C. Filter Stone: According to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control," No. FS -2, No. 4 screen opening, average -size, graded stone. D. Energy Dissipaters: According to NSSGA's "Quarried Stone for Erosion and Sediment Control," No. A-1, 3 -ton average weight armor stone, unless otherwise indicated. 2.14 DRY WELLS A. Description: ASTM C 913, precast, reinforced, perforated concrete rings. Include the following: 1. Floor: Cast -in-place concrete. 2. Cover: Liftoff -type concrete cover with cast -in lift rings. 3. Wall Thickness: 4 inches minimum with 1 -inch diameter or 1 -by -3 -inch- maximum slotted perforations arranged in rows parallel to axis of ring. 09070 (3118111) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 334100-9 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO a. Total Free Area of Perforations: Approximately 15 percent of ring interior surface. b. Ring Construction: Designed to be self -aligning. 4. Filtering Material: ASTM D 448, Size No. 24, 3f4- to 2 -112 -inch washed, crushed stone or gravel. B. Description: Manufactured PE side panels and top cover that assemble into 50 -gal. storage capacity units. Manufacturers: a. Flo -Well Products, Ltd. 2. Side Panels: With knockout ports for piping and seepage holes. 3. Top Cover: With knockout port for drain. 4. Filter Fabric: As recommended by unit manufacturer. 5. Filtering Material: ASTM D 448, Size No. 24, 314- to 2 -1f2 -inch washed, crushed stone or gravel. C. Description: Constructed -in-place aggregate type. Include the following: 1. Lining: Clay or concrete bricks. 2. Lining: Concrete blocks or precast concrete rings with notches or weep holes. 3. Filtering Material: ASTM D 448, Size No. 24, 314- to 2 -112 -inch washed, crushed stone or gravel. 4. Cover: Precast, reinforced -concrete slab, designed for structural loading according to ASTM C 890 and made according to ASTM C 913. Include slab dimensions that will extend 12 inches minimum beyond edge of excavation, with bituminous coating over entire surface. Cast cover with opening for manhole in center. 5. Manhole: 24 -inch- diameter, reinforced -concrete access lid with steel lift rings. Include bituminous coating over entire surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use nonpressure -type flexible couplings where required to join gravity -flow, nonpressure sewer piping, unless otherwise indicated. a. Shielded flexible couplings for same or minor difference OD pipes. 09070 (3118111) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100 - 10 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO IR008,111Not IDIA r[17 b. Unshielded, increaserlreducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different OD. C. Ring -type flexible couplings for piping of different sizes where annular space between smaller piping's OD and larger piping's ID permits installation. 2. Use pressure-type pipe couplings for force -main joints, B. Special Pipe Fittings: Use for pipe expansion and deflection. Pipe couplings and special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. C. Gravity -Flow, Nonpressure Sewer Piping: Use the following pipe materials for each size range: PVC sewer pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to. grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. E. Tunneling; Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both. F. Install gravity -flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: I . Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. 3. Install FVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668. G. Install corrosion -protection piping encasement over the following underground metal piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA 0105: Hub -and -spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings. Ductile -iron pipe and fittings. 09070 (3118111) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100- 11 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 4. Special pips fittings. 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic pipe joint construction is specified in Division 33 Section "Common Work Results for Utilities." Where specific joint construction is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions. B. Join gravity -flow, nonpressure drainage piping according to the following: I. Join PVC sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for clastomeric- seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for eiastomeric gasket joints. 2. Join PVC profile gravity sewer piping according to ASTM D 2.321 for elastomeric-scal joints or ASTM F 794 for gasketed joints. C. Join dissimilar pipe materials with pressure-type couplings. 3.5 BACKWATER VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install horizontal -type backwater valves in piping where indicated. B. Install combination horizontal and manual gate valve type in piping and in manholes where indicated. C. Install terminal -type backwater valves on end of piping and in manholes where indicated. 3.6 DRAIN INSTALLATION A. Install type of drains in locations indicated. 1. Use light-duty, top -loading classification drains in earth or unpaved foot -traffic areas. 2. Use medium -duty, top -loading classification drains in paved foot -traffic areas. 3. Use heavy-duty, top -loading classification drains in vehicle -traffic service areas. 4. Use extra -heavy-duty, top -loading classification drains in roads areas. B. Embed drains in 4 -inch minimum depth of concrete around bottom and sides. C. Fasten grates to drains if indicated. D. Set drain frames and covers with tops flush with pavement surface. E. Assemble trench sections with flanged joints. F. Embed trench sections in 4 -inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides. 09070 (3/18111) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100- 12 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 3.7 MANHOLE INSTALLATION A. General: Install manholes, complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated. B. h -►stall precast concrete manhole sections according to ASTM C 891. C. Construct cast -in-place manholes as indicated. D. Install PE sheeting on earth where cast -in -place -concrete manholes are to be built. E. Install FRP manholes according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Set tops of frames and covers flush with finished surface of manholes that occur in pavements. Set tops 3 inches above finished surface elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated. B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated. 3.9 STORMWATER INLET AND OUTLET INSTALLATION A. Construct inlet head walls, aprons, and sides of reinforced concrete, as indicated. B. Construct riprap of broken stone, as indicated. C. Install outlets that spill onto grade, anchored with concrete, where indicated. D. Install outlets that spill onto grade, with flared end sections that match pipe, where indicated. E. Construct energy dissipaters at outlets, as indicated. 1. Install filter fabric around outside of unit. 2. Install filtering material around outside of unit. F. Install constructed -in-place dry wells according to the following: 1. Install brick lining material dry and laid flat, with staggered joints for seepage. Build to diameter and depth indicated. 2. Install block lining material dry, with staggered joints and 20 percent minimum of blocks on side for seepage. Install precast concrete rings with notches or weep holes for seepage. Build to diameter and depth indicated. 3. Extend lining material to height where top of manhole will be approximately 8 inches below finished grade. 4. Backfill bottom of inside of lining with filtering material to level at least 12 inches above bottom. 5. Extend effluent inlet pipe 12 inches into lining and terminate into side of tee fitting. 6. Backfill around outside of lining with filtering material to top level of lining. 09070 (3118111) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100- 13 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO Install manhole over top of dry well. Support cover on undisturbed soil. Do not support cover on lining. 3.10 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place cast -in-place concrete according to ACI 318/318R. 3.11 DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install components according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface. C. Assemble channel sections to form slope down toward drain outlets. Use sealants, adhesives, fasteners, and other materials recommended by system manufacturer. D. Embed channel sections and drainage specialties in 4 -inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides. E. Fasten grates to channel sections if indicated. F. Assemble channel sections with flanged or interlocking joints. G. Embed channel sections in 4 -inch minimum concrete around bottom and sides. 3.12 CONNECTIONS A. Connect nonpressure, gravity -flow drainage piping in building's storm building drains. B. Connect force -main pressure piping to building's storm drainage force mains. Terminate piping where indicated. 1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire Wye fitting, plus 6 -inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire Wye with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 3. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 or larger, or to underground manholes and structures by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise indicated, On outside of pipe, manhole, or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground. 09070 (3118/11) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100 - 14 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO a. Use concrete that will attain a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. b. Use epoxy -bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials. 4. Protect existing piping, manholes, and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate. C. Connect to sediment interceptors specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Interceptors." 3.13 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below: 1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8 -inch- thick, brick masonry bulkheads. 2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs. B. Abandoned Manholes and Structures: Excavate around manholes and structures as required and use one procedure below: 1. Remove manhole or structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of manhole or structure down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to within 12 inches of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete. C. Backfill to grade according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3.14 PAINTING A. Clean and prepare concrete manhole surfaces for field painting. Remove loose efflorescence, chalk, dust, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen surface as required to remove glaze. Paint the following concrete surfaces as recommended by paint manufacturer: Concrete Manholes: All interior. B. Prepare ferrous frame and cover surfaces according to SSPC-PA 1 and paint according to SSPC-PA I and SSPC-Paint 16. Do not paint surfaces with foundry -applied, corrosion -resistant coating. 09070 (3118/11) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100- 15 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY — IDAHO REXBURG IDAHO 3.15 IDENTIFICATION A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tape directly over piping and at outside edge of underground structures. 1. Use detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground structures. 3.16 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project. 1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following: a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. C. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. C. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping. 3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified. 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory. B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects. 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours' advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Gravity -Flow Storm Drainage Piping: Test according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, UNI -13-6, and the following: a. Exception: Piping with soiltight joints unless required by authorities having jurisdiction. b. Option: Test plastic piping according to ASTM F 1417. C. Option: Test concrete piping according to ASTM C 924. 6. Force -Main Storm Drainage Piping: Perform hydrostatic test after thrust blocks, supports, and anchors have hardened. Test at pressure not less than 1-112 times the maximum system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. 09070 (3/18/11) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100 - 16 CENTRAL QUAD BRIGHAM YOUNG UNIVERSITY -- IDAHO REXBURGIDAHO a. Ductile -Iron Piping: Test according to AWWA C600, "Hydraulic Testing" Section. b. PVC Piping: Test according to AWWA M23, "Testing and Maintenance" Chapter. C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified. 3.17 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping of dirt and superfluous materials. Flush with potable water. END OF SECTION 33 4100 09070 (3/18/11) STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING 33 4100 - 17